1 \documentclass[synpaper]{book} 2 \usepackage[dvips]{geometry} 3 \usepackage{hyperref} 4 \usepackage{makeidx} 5 \usepackage{amssymb} 6 \usepackage{color} 7 \usepackage{alltt} 8 \usepackage{graphicx} 9 \usepackage{layout} 10 \usepackage{fancyhdr} 11 \def\union{\cup} 12 \def\intersect{\cap} 13 \def\getsrandom{\stackrel{\rm R}{\gets}} 14 \def\cross{\times} 15 \def\cat{\hspace{0.5em} \| \hspace{0.5em}} 16 \def\catn{$\|$} 17 \def\divides{\hspace{0.3em} | \hspace{0.3em}} 18 \def\nequiv{\not\equiv} 19 \def\approx{\raisebox{0.2ex}{\mbox{\small $\sim$}}} 20 \def\lcm{{\rm lcm}} 21 \def\gcd{{\rm gcd}} 22 \def\log{{\rm log}} 23 \def\ord{{\rm ord}} 24 \def\abs{{\mathit abs}} 25 \def\rep{{\mathit rep}} 26 \def\mod{{\mathit\ mod\ }} 27 \renewcommand{\pmod}[1]{\ ({\rm mod\ }{#1})} 28 \newcommand{\floor}[1]{\left\lfloor{#1}\right\rfloor} 29 \newcommand{\ceil}[1]{\left\lceil{#1}\right\rceil} 30 \def\Or{{\rm\ or\ }} 31 \def\And{{\rm\ and\ }} 32 \def\iff{\hspace{1em}\Longleftrightarrow\hspace{1em}} 33 \def\implies{\Rightarrow} 34 \def\undefined{{\rm \textit{undefined}}} 35 \def\Proof{\vspace{1ex}\noindent {\bf Proof:}\hspace{1em}} 36 \let\oldphi\phi 37 \def\phi{\varphi} 38 \def\Pr{{\rm Pr}} 39 \newcommand{\str}[1]{{\mathbf{#1}}} 40 \def\F{{\mathbb F}} 41 \def\N{{\mathbb N}} 42 \def\Z{{\mathbb Z}} 43 \def\R{{\mathbb R}} 44 \def\C{{\mathbb C}} 45 \def\Q{{\mathbb Q}} 46 \definecolor{DGray}{gray}{0.5} 47 \newcommand{\emailaddr}[1]{\mbox{$<${#1}$>$}} 48 \def\twiddle{\raisebox{0.3ex}{\mbox{\tiny $\sim$}}} 49 \def\gap{\vspace{0.5ex}} 50 \makeindex 51 \newcommand{\mysection}[1] % Re-define the chaptering command to use 52 { % THESE headers. 53 \section{#1} 54 \markboth{\textsf{www.libtom.org}}{\thesection ~ {#1}} 55 } 56 57 \newcommand{\mystarsection}[1] % Re-define the chaptering command to use 58 { % THESE headers. 59 \section*{#1} 60 \markboth{\textsf{www.libtom.org}}{{#1}} 61 } 62 \pagestyle{empty} 63 \begin{document} 64 \frontmatter 65 \pagestyle{empty} 66 67 ~ 68 69 \vspace{2in} 70 71 ~ 72 73 \begin{center} 74 \begin{Huge}LibTomCrypt\end{Huge} 75 76 ~ 77 78 \begin{large}Developer Manual\end{large} 79 80 ~ 81 82 \vspace{15mm} 83 84 85 \begin{tabular}{c} 86 Tom St Denis \\ 87 LibTom Projects 88 \end{tabular} 89 \end{center} 90 \vfil 91 \newpage 92 This document is part of the LibTomCrypt package and is hereby released into the public domain. 93 94 ~ 95 96 Open Source. Open Academia. Open Minds. 97 98 ~ 99 100 \begin{flushright} 101 Tom St Denis 102 ~ 103 104 Ottawa, Ontario 105 ~ 106 107 Canada 108 ~ 109 \vfil 110 \end{flushright} 111 \newpage 112 113 \tableofcontents 114 \listoffigures 115 \pagestyle{myheadings} 116 \mainmatter 117 \chapter{Introduction} 118 \mysection{What is the LibTomCrypt?} 119 LibTomCrypt is a portable ISO C cryptographic library meant to be a tool set for cryptographers who are 120 designing cryptosystems. It supports symmetric ciphers, one-way hashes, pseudo-random number generators, 121 public key cryptography (via PKCS \#1 RSA, DH or ECCDH), and a plethora of support routines. 122 123 The library was designed such that new ciphers/hashes/PRNGs can be added at run-time and the existing API 124 (and helper API functions) are able to use the new designs automatically. There exists self-check functions for each 125 block cipher and hash function to ensure that they compile and execute to the published design specifications. The library 126 also performs extensive parameter error checking to prevent any number of run-time exploits or errors. 127 128 \subsection{What the library IS for?} 129 130 The library serves as a toolkit for developers who have to solve cryptographic problems. Out of the box LibTomCrypt 131 does not process SSL or OpenPGP messages, it doesn't read X.509 certificates, or write PEM encoded data. It does, however, 132 provide all of the tools required to build such functionality. LibTomCrypt was designed to be a flexible library that 133 was not tied to any particular cryptographic problem. 134 135 \mysection{Why did I write it?} 136 You may be wondering, \textit{Tom, why did you write a crypto library. I already have one.} Well the reason falls into 137 two categories: 138 \begin{enumerate} 139 \item I am too lazy to figure out someone else's API. I'd rather invent my own simpler API and use that. 140 \item It was (still is) good coding practice. 141 \end{enumerate} 142 143 The idea is that I am not striving to replace OpenSSL or Crypto++ or Cryptlib or etc. I'm trying to write my 144 {\bf own} crypto library and hopefully along the way others will appreciate the work. 145 146 With this library all core functions (ciphers, hashes, prngs, and bignum) have the same prototype definition. They all load 147 and store data in a format independent of the platform. This means if you encrypt with Blowfish on a PPC it should decrypt 148 on an x86 with zero problems. The consistent API also means that if you learn how to use Blowfish with the library you 149 know how to use Safer+, RC6, or Serpent as well. With all of the core functions there are central descriptor tables 150 that can be used to make a program automatically pick between ciphers, hashes and PRNGs at run-time. That means your 151 application can support all ciphers/hashes/prngs/bignum without changing the source code. 152 153 Not only did I strive to make a consistent and simple API to work with but I also attempted to make the library 154 configurable in terms of its build options. Out of the box the library will build with any modern version of GCC 155 without having to use configure scripts. This means that the library will work with platforms where development 156 tools may be limited (e.g. no autoconf). 157 158 On top of making the build simple and the API approachable I've also attempted for a reasonably high level of 159 robustness and efficiency. LibTomCrypt traps and returns a series of errors ranging from invalid 160 arguments to buffer overflows/overruns. It is mostly thread safe and has been clocked on various platforms 161 with \textit{cycles per byte} timings that are comparable (and often favourable) to other libraries such as OpenSSL and 162 Crypto++. 163 164 \subsection{Modular} 165 The LibTomCrypt package has also been written to be very modular. The block ciphers, one--way hashes, 166 pseudo--random number generators (PRNG), and bignum math routines are all used within the API through \textit{descriptor} tables which 167 are essentially structures with pointers to functions. While you can still call particular functions 168 directly (\textit{e.g. sha256\_process()}) this descriptor interface allows the developer to customize their 169 usage of the library. 170 171 For example, consider a hardware platform with a specialized RNG device. Obviously one would like to tap 172 that for the PRNG needs within the library (\textit{e.g. making a RSA key}). All the developer has to do 173 is write a descriptor and the few support routines required for the device. After that the rest of the 174 API can make use of it without change. Similarly imagine a few years down the road when AES2 175 (\textit{or whatever they call it}) has been invented. It can be added to the library and used within applications 176 with zero modifications to the end applications provided they are written properly. 177 178 This flexibility within the library means it can be used with any combination of primitive algorithms and 179 unlike libraries like OpenSSL is not tied to direct routines. For instance, in OpenSSL there are CBC block 180 mode routines for every single cipher. That means every time you add or remove a cipher from the library 181 you have to update the associated support code as well. In LibTomCrypt the associated code (\textit{chaining modes in this case}) 182 are not directly tied to the ciphers. That is a new cipher can be added to the library by simply providing 183 the key setup, ECB decrypt and encrypt and test vector routines. After that all five chaining mode routines 184 can make use of the cipher right away. 185 186 \mysection{License} 187 188 The project is hereby released as public domain. 189 190 \mysection{Patent Disclosure} 191 192 The author (Tom St Denis) is not a patent lawyer so this section is not to be treated as legal advice. To the best 193 of the authors knowledge the only patent related issues within the library are the RC5 and RC6 symmetric block ciphers. 194 They can be removed from a build by simply commenting out the two appropriate lines in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h}. The rest 195 of the ciphers and hashes are patent free or under patents that have since expired. 196 197 The RC2 and RC4 symmetric ciphers are not under patents but are under trademark regulations. This means you can use 198 the ciphers you just can't advertise that you are doing so. 199 200 \mysection{Thanks} 201 I would like to give thanks to the following people (in no particular order) for helping me develop this project from 202 early on: 203 \begin{enumerate} 204 \item Richard van de Laarschot 205 \item Richard Heathfield 206 \item Ajay K. Agrawal 207 \item Brian Gladman 208 \item Svante Seleborg 209 \item Clay Culver 210 \item Jason Klapste 211 \item Dobes Vandermeer 212 \item Daniel Richards 213 \item Wayne Scott 214 \item Andrew Tyler 215 \item Sky Schulz 216 \item Christopher Imes 217 \end{enumerate} 218 219 There have been quite a few other people as well. Please check the change log to see who else has contributed from 220 time to time. 221 222 \chapter{The Application Programming Interface (API)} 223 \mysection{Introduction} 224 \index{CRYPT\_ERROR} \index{CRYPT\_OK} 225 226 In general the API is very simple to memorize and use. Most of the functions return either {\bf void} or {\bf int}. Functions 227 that return {\bf int} will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the function was successful, or one of the many error codes 228 if it failed. Certain functions that return int will return $-1$ to indicate an error. These functions will be explicitly 229 commented upon. When a function does return a CRYPT error code it can be translated into a string with 230 231 \index{error\_to\_string()} 232 \begin{verbatim} 233 const char *error_to_string(int err); 234 \end{verbatim} 235 236 An example of handling an error is: 237 \begin{small} 238 \begin{verbatim} 239 void somefunc(void) 240 { 241 int err; 242 243 /* call a cryptographic function */ 244 if ((err = some_crypto_function(...)) != CRYPT_OK) { 245 printf("A crypto error occurred, %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 246 /* perform error handling */ 247 } 248 /* continue on if no error occurred */ 249 } 250 \end{verbatim} 251 \end{small} 252 253 There is no initialization routine for the library and for the most part the code is thread safe. The only thread 254 related issue is if you use the same symmetric cipher, hash or public key state data in multiple threads. Normally 255 that is not an issue. 256 257 To include the prototypes for \textit{LibTomCrypt.a} into your own program simply include \textit{tomcrypt.h} like so: 258 \begin{small} 259 \begin{verbatim} 260 #include <tomcrypt.h> 261 int main(void) { 262 return 0; 263 } 264 \end{verbatim} 265 \end{small} 266 267 The header file \textit{tomcrypt.h} also includes \textit{stdio.h}, \textit{string.h}, \textit{stdlib.h}, \textit{time.h} and \textit{ctype.h}. 268 269 \mysection{Macros} 270 271 There are a few helper macros to make the coding process a bit easier. The first set are related to loading and storing 272 32/64-bit words in little/big endian format. The macros are: 273 274 \index{STORE32L} \index{STORE64L} \index{LOAD32L} \index{LOAD64L} \index{STORE32H} \index{STORE64H} \index{LOAD32H} \index{LOAD64H} \index{BSWAP} 275 \newpage 276 \begin{figure}[hpbt] 277 \begin{small} 278 \begin{center} 279 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} 280 \hline STORE32L(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[0 \ldots 3]$ \\ 281 \hline STORE64L(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[0 \ldots 7]$ \\ 282 \hline LOAD32L(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[0 \ldots 3] \to x$ \\ 283 \hline LOAD64L(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[0 \ldots 7] \to x$ \\ 284 \hline STORE32H(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[3 \ldots 0]$ \\ 285 \hline STORE64H(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[7 \ldots 0]$ \\ 286 \hline LOAD32H(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[3 \ldots 0] \to x$ \\ 287 \hline LOAD64H(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long long} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[7 \ldots 0] \to x$ \\ 288 \hline BSWAP(x) & {\bf unsigned long} x & Swap bytes \\ 289 \hline 290 \end{tabular} 291 \caption{Load And Store Macros} 292 \end{center} 293 \end{small} 294 \end{figure} 295 296 There are 32 and 64-bit cyclic rotations as well: 297 \index{ROL} \index{ROR} \index{ROL64} \index{ROR64} \index{ROLc} \index{RORc} \index{ROL64c} \index{ROR64c} 298 \begin{figure}[hpbt] 299 \begin{small} 300 \begin{center} 301 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} 302 \hline ROL(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned long} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\ 303 \hline ROLc(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf const unsigned long} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\ 304 \hline ROR(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned long} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\ 305 \hline RORc(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf const unsigned long} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\ 306 \hline && \\ 307 \hline ROL64(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned long} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\ 308 \hline ROL64c(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf const unsigned long} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\ 309 \hline ROR64(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf unsigned long} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\ 310 \hline ROR64c(x, y) & {\bf unsigned long} x, {\bf const unsigned long} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\ 311 \hline 312 \end{tabular} 313 \caption{Rotate Macros} 314 \end{center} 315 \end{small} 316 \end{figure} 317 318 \mysection{Functions with Variable Length Output} 319 Certain functions such as (for example) \textit{rsa\_export()} give an output that is variable length. To prevent buffer overflows you 320 must pass it the length of the buffer where the output will be stored. For example: 321 \index{rsa\_export()} \index{error\_to\_string()} \index{variable length output} 322 \begin{small} 323 \begin{verbatim} 324 #include <tomcrypt.h> 325 int main(void) { 326 rsa_key key; 327 unsigned char buffer[1024]; 328 unsigned long x; 329 int err; 330 331 /* ... Make up the RSA key somehow ... */ 332 333 /* lets export the key, set x to the size of the 334 * output buffer */ 335 x = sizeof(buffer); 336 if ((err = rsa_export(buffer, &x, PK_PUBLIC, &key)) != CRYPT_OK) { 337 printf("Export error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 338 return -1; 339 } 340 341 /* if rsa_export() was successful then x will have 342 * the size of the output */ 343 printf("RSA exported key takes %d bytes\n", x); 344 345 /* ... do something with the buffer */ 346 347 return 0; 348 } 349 \end{verbatim} 350 \end{small} 351 In the above example if the size of the RSA public key was more than 1024 bytes this function would return an error code 352 indicating a buffer overflow would have occurred. If the function succeeds, it stores the length of the output back into 353 \textit{x} so that the calling application will know how many bytes were used. 354 355 As of v1.13, most functions will update your length on failure to indicate the size required by the function. Not all functions 356 support this so please check the source before you rely on it doing that. 357 358 \mysection{Functions that need a PRNG} 359 \index{Pseudo Random Number Generator} \index{PRNG} 360 Certain functions such as \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} require a Pseudo Random Number Generator (PRNG). These functions do not setup 361 the PRNG themselves so it is the responsibility of the calling function to initialize the PRNG before calling them. 362 363 Certain PRNG algorithms do not require a \textit{prng\_state} argument (sprng for example). The \textit{prng\_state} argument 364 may be passed as \textbf{NULL} in such situations. 365 366 \index{register\_prng()} \index{rsa\_make\_key()} 367 \begin{small} 368 \begin{verbatim} 369 #include <tomcrypt.h> 370 int main(void) { 371 rsa_key key; 372 int err; 373 374 /* register the system RNG */ 375 register_prng(&sprng_desc) 376 377 /* make a 1024-bit RSA key with the system RNG */ 378 if ((err = rsa_make_key(NULL, find_prng("sprng"), 1024/8, 65537, &key)) 379 != CRYPT_OK) { 380 printf("make_key error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 381 return -1; 382 } 383 384 /* use the key ... */ 385 386 return 0; 387 } 388 \end{verbatim} 389 \end{small} 390 391 \mysection{Functions that use Arrays of Octets} 392 Most functions require inputs that are arrays of the data type \textit{unsigned char}. Whether it is a symmetric key, IV 393 for a chaining mode or public key packet it is assumed that regardless of the actual size of \textit{unsigned char} only the 394 lower eight bits contain data. For example, if you want to pass a 256 bit key to a symmetric ciphers setup routine, you 395 must pass in (a pointer to) an array of 32 \textit{unsigned char} variables. Certain routines (such as SAFER+) take 396 special care to work properly on platforms where an \textit{unsigned char} is not eight bits. 397 398 For the purposes of this library, the term \textit{byte} will refer to an octet or eight bit word. Typically an array of 399 type \textit{byte} will be synonymous with an array of type \textit{unsigned char.} 400 401 \chapter{Symmetric Block Ciphers} 402 \mysection{Core Functions} 403 LibTomCrypt provides several block ciphers with an ECB block mode interface. It is important to first note that you 404 should never use the ECB modes directly to encrypt data. Instead you should use the ECB functions to make a chaining mode, 405 or use one of the provided chaining modes. All of the ciphers are written as ECB interfaces since it allows the rest of 406 the API to grow in a modular fashion. 407 408 \subsection{Key Scheduling} 409 All ciphers store their scheduled keys in a single data type called \textit{symmetric\_key}. This allows all ciphers to 410 have the same prototype and store their keys as naturally as possible. This also removes the need for dynamic memory 411 allocation, and allows you to allocate a fixed sized buffer for storing scheduled keys. All ciphers must provide six visible 412 functions which are (given that XXX is the name of the cipher) the following: 413 \index{Cipher Setup} 414 \begin{verbatim} 415 int XXX_setup(const unsigned char *key, 416 int keylen, 417 int rounds, 418 symmetric_key *skey); 419 \end{verbatim} 420 421 The XXX\_setup() routine will setup the cipher to be used with a given number of rounds and a given key length (in bytes). 422 The number of rounds can be set to zero to use the default, which is generally a good idea. 423 424 If the function returns successfully the variable \textit{skey} will have a scheduled key stored in it. It's important to note 425 that you should only used this scheduled key with the intended cipher. For example, if you call \textit{blowfish\_setup()} do not 426 pass the scheduled key onto \textit{rc5\_ecb\_encrypt()}. All built--in setup functions do not allocate memory off the heap so 427 when you are done with a key you can simply discard it (e.g. they can be on the stack). However, to maintain proper coding 428 practices you should always call the respective XXX\_done() function. This allows for quicker porting to applications with 429 externally supplied plugins. 430 431 \subsection{ECB Encryption and Decryption} 432 To encrypt or decrypt a block in ECB mode there are these two functions per cipher: 433 \index{Cipher Encrypt} \index{Cipher Decrypt} 434 \begin{verbatim} 435 int XXX_ecb_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt, 436 unsigned char *ct, 437 symmetric_key *skey); 438 439 int XXX_ecb_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct, 440 unsigned char *pt, 441 symmetric_key *skey); 442 \end{verbatim} 443 These two functions will encrypt or decrypt (respectively) a single block of text\footnote{The size of which depends on 444 which cipher you are using.}, storing the result in the \textit{ct} buffer (\textit{pt} resp.). It is possible that the input and output buffer are 445 the same buffer. For the encrypt function \textit{pt}\footnote{pt stands for plaintext.} is the input and 446 \textit{ct}\footnote{ct stands for ciphertext.} is the output. For the decryption function it's the opposite. They both 447 return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. To test a particular cipher against test vectors\footnote{As published in their design papers.} 448 call the following self-test function. 449 450 \subsection{Self--Testing} 451 \index{Cipher Testing} 452 \begin{verbatim} 453 int XXX_test(void); 454 \end{verbatim} 455 This function will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the cipher matches the test vectors from the design publication it is 456 based upon. 457 458 \subsection{Key Sizing} 459 For each cipher there is a function which will help find a desired key size. It is specified as follows: 460 \index{Key Sizing} 461 \begin{verbatim} 462 int XXX_keysize(int *keysize); 463 \end{verbatim} 464 Essentially, it will round the input keysize in \textit{keysize} down to the next appropriate key size. This function 465 will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the key size specified is acceptable. For example: 466 \begin{small} 467 \begin{verbatim} 468 #include <tomcrypt.h> 469 int main(void) 470 { 471 int keysize, err; 472 473 /* now given a 20 byte key what keysize does Twofish want to use? */ 474 keysize = 20; 475 if ((err = twofish_keysize(&keysize)) != CRYPT_OK) { 476 printf("Error getting key size: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 477 return -1; 478 } 479 printf("Twofish suggested a key size of %d\n", keysize); 480 return 0; 481 } 482 \end{verbatim} 483 \end{small} 484 This should indicate a keysize of sixteen bytes is suggested by storing 16 in \textit{keysize.} 485 486 \subsection{Cipher Termination} 487 When you are finished with a cipher you can de--initialize it with the done function. 488 \begin{verbatim} 489 void XXX_done(symmetric_key *skey); 490 \end{verbatim} 491 For the software based ciphers within LibTomCrypt, these functions will not do anything. However, user supplied 492 cipher descriptors may require to be called for resource management purposes. To be compliant, all functions which call a cipher 493 setup function must also call the respective cipher done function when finished. 494 495 \subsection{Simple Encryption Demonstration} 496 An example snippet that encodes a block with Blowfish in ECB mode. 497 498 \index{blowfish\_setup()} \index{blowfish\_ecb\_encrypt()} \index{blowfish\_ecb\_decrypt()} \index{blowfish\_done()} 499 \begin{small} 500 \begin{verbatim} 501 #include <tomcrypt.h> 502 int main(void) 503 { 504 unsigned char pt[8], ct[8], key[8]; 505 symmetric_key skey; 506 int err; 507 508 /* ... key is loaded appropriately in key ... */ 509 /* ... load a block of plaintext in pt ... */ 510 511 /* schedule the key */ 512 if ((err = blowfish_setup(key, /* the key we will use */ 513 8, /* key is 8 bytes (64-bits) long */ 514 0, /* 0 == use default # of rounds */ 515 &skey) /* where to put the scheduled key */ 516 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 517 printf("Setup error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 518 return -1; 519 } 520 521 /* encrypt the block */ 522 blowfish_ecb_encrypt(pt, /* encrypt this 8-byte array */ 523 ct, /* store encrypted data here */ 524 &skey); /* our previously scheduled key */ 525 526 /* now ct holds the encrypted version of pt */ 527 528 /* decrypt the block */ 529 blowfish_ecb_decrypt(ct, /* decrypt this 8-byte array */ 530 pt, /* store decrypted data here */ 531 &skey); /* our previously scheduled key */ 532 533 /* now we have decrypted ct to the original plaintext in pt */ 534 535 /* Terminate the cipher context */ 536 blowfish_done(&skey); 537 538 return 0; 539 } 540 \end{verbatim} 541 \end{small} 542 543 \mysection{Key Sizes and Number of Rounds} 544 \index{Symmetric Keys} 545 As a general rule of thumb, do not use symmetric keys under 80 bits if you can help it. Only a few of the ciphers support smaller 546 keys (mainly for test vectors anyways). Ideally, your application should be making at least 256 bit keys. This is not 547 because you are to be paranoid. It is because if your PRNG has a bias of any sort the more bits the better. For 548 example, if you have $\mbox{Pr}\left[X = 1\right] = {1 \over 2} \pm \gamma$ where $\vert \gamma \vert > 0$ then the 549 total amount of entropy in N bits is $N \cdot -log_2\left ({1 \over 2} + \vert \gamma \vert \right)$. So if $\gamma$ 550 were $0.25$ (a severe bias) a 256-bit string would have about 106 bits of entropy whereas a 128-bit string would have 551 only 53 bits of entropy. 552 553 The number of rounds of most ciphers is not an option you can change. Only RC5 allows you to change the number of 554 rounds. By passing zero as the number of rounds all ciphers will use their default number of rounds. Generally the 555 ciphers are configured such that the default number of rounds provide adequate security for the given block and key 556 size. 557 558 \mysection{The Cipher Descriptors} 559 \index{Cipher Descriptor} 560 To facilitate automatic routines an array of cipher descriptors is provided in the array \textit{cipher\_descriptor}. An element 561 of this array has the following (partial) format (See Section \ref{sec:cipherdesc}): 562 563 \begin{small} 564 \begin{verbatim} 565 struct _cipher_descriptor { 566 /** name of cipher */ 567 char *name; 568 569 /** internal ID */ 570 unsigned char ID; 571 572 /** min keysize (octets) */ 573 int min_key_length, 574 575 /** max keysize (octets) */ 576 max_key_length, 577 578 /** block size (octets) */ 579 block_length, 580 581 /** default number of rounds */ 582 default_rounds; 583 ...<snip>... 584 }; 585 \end{verbatim} 586 \end{small} 587 588 Where \textit{name} is the lower case ASCII version of the name. The fields \textit{min\_key\_length} and \textit{max\_key\_length} 589 are the minimum and maximum key sizes in bytes. The \textit{block\_length} member is the block size of the cipher 590 in bytes. As a good rule of thumb it is assumed that the cipher supports 591 the min and max key lengths but not always everything in between. The \textit{default\_rounds} field is the default number 592 of rounds that will be used. 593 594 For a plugin to be compliant it must provide at least each function listed before the accelerators begin. Accelerators are optional, 595 and if missing will be emulated in software. 596 597 The remaining fields are all pointers to the core functions for each cipher. The end of the cipher\_descriptor array is 598 marked when \textit{name} equals {\bf NULL}. 599 600 As of this release the current cipher\_descriptors elements are the following: 601 \vfil 602 \index{Cipher descriptor table} 603 \index{blowfish\_desc} \index{xtea\_desc} \index{rc2\_desc} \index{rc5\_desc} \index{rc6\_desc} \index{saferp\_desc} \index{aes\_desc} \index{twofish\_desc} 604 \index{des\_desc} \index{des3\_desc} \index{noekeon\_desc} \index{skipjack\_desc} \index{anubis\_desc} \index{khazad\_desc} \index{kseed\_desc} \index{kasumi\_desc} 605 \begin{figure}[hpbt] 606 \begin{small} 607 \begin{center} 608 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|} 609 \hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor Name} & \textbf{Block Size} & \textbf{Key Range} & \textbf{Rounds} \\ 610 \hline Blowfish & blowfish\_desc & 8 & 8 $\ldots$ 56 & 16 \\ 611 \hline X-Tea & xtea\_desc & 8 & 16 & 32 \\ 612 \hline RC2 & rc2\_desc & 8 & 8 $\ldots$ 128 & 16 \\ 613 \hline RC5-32/12/b & rc5\_desc & 8 & 8 $\ldots$ 128 & 12 $\ldots$ 24 \\ 614 \hline RC6-32/20/b & rc6\_desc & 16 & 8 $\ldots$ 128 & 20 \\ 615 \hline SAFER+ & saferp\_desc &16 & 16, 24, 32 & 8, 12, 16 \\ 616 \hline AES & aes\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 10, 12, 14 \\ 617 & aes\_enc\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 10, 12, 14 \\ 618 \hline Twofish & twofish\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 16 \\ 619 \hline DES & des\_desc & 8 & 7 & 16 \\ 620 \hline 3DES (EDE mode) & des3\_desc & 8 & 21 & 16 \\ 621 \hline CAST5 (CAST-128) & cast5\_desc & 8 & 5 $\ldots$ 16 & 12, 16 \\ 622 \hline Noekeon & noekeon\_desc & 16 & 16 & 16 \\ 623 \hline Skipjack & skipjack\_desc & 8 & 10 & 32 \\ 624 \hline Anubis & anubis\_desc & 16 & 16 $\ldots$ 40 & 12 $\ldots$ 18 \\ 625 \hline Khazad & khazad\_desc & 8 & 16 & 8 \\ 626 \hline SEED & kseed\_desc & 16 & 16 & 16 \\ 627 \hline KASUMI & kasumi\_desc & 8 & 16 & 8 \\ 628 \hline 629 \end{tabular} 630 \end{center} 631 \end{small} 632 \caption{Built--In Software Ciphers} 633 \end{figure} 634 635 \subsection{Notes} 636 \begin{small} 637 \begin{enumerate} 638 \item 639 For AES, (also known as Rijndael) there are four descriptors which complicate issues a little. The descriptors 640 rijndael\_desc and rijndael\_enc\_desc provide the cipher named \textit{rijndael}. The descriptors aes\_desc and 641 aes\_enc\_desc provide the cipher name \textit{aes}. Functionally both \textit{rijndael} and \textit{aes} are the same cipher. The 642 only difference is when you call find\_cipher() you have to pass the correct name. The cipher descriptors with \textit{enc} 643 in the middle (e.g. rijndael\_enc\_desc) are related to an implementation of Rijndael with only the encryption routine 644 and tables. The decryption and self--test function pointers of both \textit{encrypt only} descriptors are set to \textbf{NULL} and 645 should not be called. 646 647 The \textit{encrypt only} descriptors are useful for applications that only use the encryption function of the cipher. Algorithms such 648 as EAX, PMAC and OMAC only require the encryption function. So far this \textit{encrypt only} functionality has only been implemented for 649 Rijndael as it makes the most sense for this cipher. 650 651 \item 652 Note that for \textit{DES} and \textit{3DES} they use 8 and 24 byte keys but only 7 and 21 [respectively] bytes of the keys are in 653 fact used for the purposes of encryption. My suggestion is just to use random 8/24 byte keys instead of trying to make a 8/24 654 byte string from the real 7/21 byte key. 655 656 \item 657 Note that \textit{Twofish} has additional configuration options (Figure \ref{fig:twofishopts}) that take place at build time. These options are found in 658 the file \textit{tomcrypt\_cfg.h}. The first option is \textit{TWOFISH\_SMALL} which when defined will force the Twofish code 659 to not pre-compute the Twofish \textit{$g(X)$} function as a set of four $8 \times 32$ s-boxes. This means that a scheduled 660 key will require less ram but the resulting cipher will be slower. The second option is \textit{TWOFISH\_TABLES} which when 661 defined will force the Twofish code to use pre-computed tables for the two s-boxes $q_0, q_1$ as well as the multiplication 662 by the polynomials 5B and EF used in the MDS multiplication. As a result the code is faster and slightly larger. The 663 speed increase is useful when \textit{TWOFISH\_SMALL} is defined since the s-boxes and MDS multiply form the heart of the 664 Twofish round function. 665 666 \begin{figure}[hpbt] 667 \index{Twofish build options} \index{TWOFISH\_SMALL} \index{TWOFISH\_TABLES} 668 \begin{small} 669 \begin{center} 670 \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|} 671 \hline \textbf{TWOFISH\_SMALL} & \textbf{TWOFISH\_TABLES} & \textbf{Speed and Memory (per key)} \\ 672 \hline undefined & undefined & Very fast, 4.2KB of ram. \\ 673 \hline undefined & defined & Faster key setup, larger code. \\ 674 \hline defined & undefined & Very slow, 0.2KB of ram. \\ 675 \hline defined & defined & Faster, 0.2KB of ram, larger code. \\ 676 \hline 677 \end{tabular} 678 \end{center} 679 \end{small} 680 \caption{Twofish Build Options} 681 \label{fig:twofishopts} 682 \end{figure} 683 \end{enumerate} 684 \end{small} 685 686 To work with the cipher\_descriptor array there is a function: 687 \index{find\_cipher()} 688 \begin{verbatim} 689 int find_cipher(char *name) 690 \end{verbatim} 691 Which will search for a given name in the array. It returns $-1$ if the cipher is not found, otherwise it returns 692 the location in the array where the cipher was found. For example, to indirectly setup Blowfish you can also use: 693 \begin{small} 694 \index{register\_cipher()} \index{find\_cipher()} \index{error\_to\_string()} 695 \begin{verbatim} 696 #include <tomcrypt.h> 697 int main(void) 698 { 699 unsigned char key[8]; 700 symmetric_key skey; 701 int err; 702 703 /* you must register a cipher before you use it */ 704 if (register_cipher(&blowfish_desc)) == -1) { 705 printf("Unable to register Blowfish cipher."); 706 return -1; 707 } 708 709 /* generic call to function (assuming the key 710 * in key[] was already setup) */ 711 if ((err = 712 cipher_descriptor[find_cipher("blowfish")]. 713 setup(key, 8, 0, &skey)) != CRYPT_OK) { 714 printf("Error setting up Blowfish: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 715 return -1; 716 } 717 718 /* ... use cipher ... */ 719 } 720 \end{verbatim} 721 \end{small} 722 723 A good safety would be to check the return value of \textit{find\_cipher()} before accessing the desired function. In order 724 to use a cipher with the descriptor table you must register it first using: 725 \index{register\_cipher()} 726 \begin{verbatim} 727 int register_cipher(const struct _cipher_descriptor *cipher); 728 \end{verbatim} 729 Which accepts a pointer to a descriptor and returns the index into the global descriptor table. If an error occurs such 730 as there is no more room (it can have 32 ciphers at most) it will return {\bf{-1}}. If you try to add the same cipher more 731 than once it will just return the index of the first copy. To remove a cipher call: 732 \index{unregister\_cipher()} 733 \begin{verbatim} 734 int unregister_cipher(const struct _cipher_descriptor *cipher); 735 \end{verbatim} 736 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if it removes the cipher, otherwise it returns {\bf CRYPT\_ERROR}. 737 \begin{small} 738 \begin{verbatim} 739 #include <tomcrypt.h> 740 int main(void) 741 { 742 int err; 743 744 /* register the cipher */ 745 if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) { 746 printf("Error registering Rijndael\n"); 747 return -1; 748 } 749 750 /* use Rijndael */ 751 752 /* remove it */ 753 if ((err = unregister_cipher(&rijndael_desc)) != CRYPT_OK) { 754 printf("Error removing Rijndael: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 755 return -1; 756 } 757 758 return 0; 759 } 760 \end{verbatim} 761 \end{small} 762 This snippet is a small program that registers Rijndael. 763 764 \mysection{Symmetric Modes of Operations} 765 \subsection{Background} 766 A typical symmetric block cipher can be used in chaining modes to effectively encrypt messages larger than the block 767 size of the cipher. Given a key $k$, a plaintext $P$ and a cipher $E$ we shall denote the encryption of the block 768 $P$ under the key $k$ as $E_k(P)$. In some modes there exists an initial vector denoted as $C_{-1}$. 769 770 \subsubsection{ECB Mode} 771 \index{ECB mode} 772 ECB or Electronic Codebook Mode is the simplest method to use. It is given as: 773 \begin{equation} 774 C_i = E_k(P_i) 775 \end{equation} 776 This mode is very weak since it allows people to swap blocks and perform replay attacks if the same key is used more 777 than once. 778 779 \subsubsection{CBC Mode} 780 \index{CBC mode} 781 CBC or Cipher Block Chaining mode is a simple mode designed to prevent trivial forms of replay and swap attacks on ciphers. 782 It is given as: 783 \begin{equation} 784 C_i = E_k(P_i \oplus C_{i - 1}) 785 \end{equation} 786 It is important that the initial vector be unique and preferably random for each message encrypted under the same key. 787 788 \subsubsection{CTR Mode} 789 \index{CTR mode} 790 CTR or Counter Mode is a mode which only uses the encryption function of the cipher. Given a initial vector which is 791 treated as a large binary counter the CTR mode is given as: 792 \begin{eqnarray} 793 C_{-1} = C_{-1} + 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }2^W) \nonumber \\ 794 C_i = P_i \oplus E_k(C_{-1}) 795 \end{eqnarray} 796 Where $W$ is the size of a block in bits (e.g. 64 for Blowfish). As long as the initial vector is random for each message 797 encrypted under the same key replay and swap attacks are infeasible. CTR mode may look simple but it is as secure 798 as the block cipher is under a chosen plaintext attack (provided the initial vector is unique). 799 800 \subsubsection{CFB Mode} 801 \index{CFB mode} 802 CFB or Ciphertext Feedback Mode is a mode akin to CBC. It is given as: 803 \begin{eqnarray} 804 C_i = P_i \oplus C_{-1} \nonumber \\ 805 C_{-1} = E_k(C_i) 806 \end{eqnarray} 807 Note that in this library the output feedback width is equal to the size of the block cipher. That is this mode is used 808 to encrypt whole blocks at a time. However, the library will buffer data allowing the user to encrypt or decrypt partial 809 blocks without a delay. When this mode is first setup it will initially encrypt the initial vector as required. 810 811 \subsubsection{OFB Mode} 812 \index{OFB mode} 813 OFB or Output Feedback Mode is a mode akin to CBC as well. It is given as: 814 \begin{eqnarray} 815 C_{-1} = E_k(C_{-1}) \nonumber \\ 816 C_i = P_i \oplus C_{-1} 817 \end{eqnarray} 818 Like the CFB mode the output width in CFB mode is the same as the width of the block cipher. OFB mode will also 819 buffer the output which will allow you to encrypt or decrypt partial blocks without delay. 820 821 \subsection{Choice of Mode} 822 My personal preference is for the CTR mode since it has several key benefits: 823 \begin{enumerate} 824 \item No short cycles which is possible in the OFB and CFB modes. 825 \item Provably as secure as the block cipher being used under a chosen plaintext attack. 826 \item Technically does not require the decryption routine of the cipher. 827 \item Allows random access to the plaintext. 828 \item Allows the encryption of block sizes that are not equal to the size of the block cipher. 829 \end{enumerate} 830 The CTR, CFB and OFB routines provided allow you to encrypt block sizes that differ from the ciphers block size. They 831 accomplish this by buffering the data required to complete a block. This allows you to encrypt or decrypt any size 832 block of memory with either of the three modes. 833 834 The ECB and CBC modes process blocks of the same size as the cipher at a time. Therefore, they are less flexible than the 835 other modes. 836 837 \subsection{Ciphertext Stealing} 838 \index{Ciphertext stealing} 839 Ciphertext stealing is a method of dealing with messages in CBC mode which are not a multiple of the block length. This is accomplished 840 by encrypting the last ciphertext block in ECB mode, and XOR'ing the output against the last partial block of plaintext. LibTomCrypt does not 841 support this mode directly but it is fairly easy to emulate with a call to the cipher's ecb\_encrypt() callback function. 842 843 The more sane way to deal with partial blocks is to pad them with zeroes, and then use CBC normally. 844 845 \subsection{Initialization} 846 \index{CBC Mode} \index{CTR Mode} 847 \index{OFB Mode} \index{CFB Mode} 848 The library provides simple support routines for handling CBC, CTR, CFB, OFB and ECB encoded messages. Assuming the mode 849 you want is XXX there is a structure called \textit{symmetric\_XXX} that will contain the information required to 850 use that mode. They have identical setup routines (except CTR and ECB mode): 851 \index{ecb\_start()} \index{cfb\_start()} \index{cbc\_start()} \index{ofb\_start()} \index{ctr\_start()} 852 \begin{verbatim} 853 int XXX_start( int cipher, 854 const unsigned char *IV, 855 const unsigned char *key, 856 int keylen, 857 int num_rounds, 858 symmetric_XXX *XXX); 859 860 int ctr_start( int cipher, 861 const unsigned char *IV, 862 const unsigned char *key, 863 int keylen, 864 int num_rounds, 865 int ctr_mode, 866 symmetric_CTR *ctr); 867 868 int ecb_start( int cipher, 869 const unsigned char *key, 870 int keylen, 871 int num_rounds, 872 symmetric_ECB *ecb); 873 \end{verbatim} 874 875 In each case, \textit{cipher} is the index into the cipher\_descriptor array of the cipher you want to use. The \textit{IV} value is 876 the initialization vector to be used with the cipher. You must fill the IV yourself and it is assumed they are the same 877 length as the block size\footnote{In other words the size of a block of plaintext for the cipher, e.g. 8 for DES, 16 for AES, etc.} 878 of the cipher you choose. It is important that the IV be random for each unique message you want to encrypt. The 879 parameters \textit{key}, \textit{keylen} and \textit{num\_rounds} are the same as in the XXX\_setup() function call. The final parameter 880 is a pointer to the structure you want to hold the information for the mode of operation. 881 882 883 In the case of CTR mode there is an additional parameter \textit{ctr\_mode} which specifies the mode that the counter is to be used in. 884 If \textbf{CTR\_COUNTER\_ LITTLE\_ENDIAN} was specified then the counter will be treated as a little endian value. Otherwise, if 885 \textbf{CTR\_COUNTER\_BIG\_ENDIAN} was specified the counter will be treated as a big endian value. As of v1.15 the RFC 3686 style of 886 increment then encrypt is also supported. By OR'ing \textbf{LTC\_CTR\_RFC3686} with the CTR \textit{mode} value, ctr\_start() will increment 887 the counter before encrypting it for the first time. 888 889 The routines return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the cipher initialized correctly, otherwise, they return an error code. 890 891 \subsection{Encryption and Decryption} 892 To actually encrypt or decrypt the following routines are provided: 893 \index{ecb\_encrypt()} \index{ecb\_decrypt()} \index{cfb\_encrypt()} \index{cfb\_decrypt()} 894 \index{cbc\_encrypt()} \index{cbc\_decrypt()} \index{ofb\_encrypt()} \index{ofb\_decrypt()} \index{ctr\_encrypt()} \index{ctr\_decrypt()} 895 \begin{verbatim} 896 int XXX_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt, 897 unsigned char *ct, 898 unsigned long len, 899 symmetric_YYY *YYY); 900 901 int XXX_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct, 902 unsigned char *pt, 903 unsigned long len, 904 symmetric_YYY *YYY); 905 \end{verbatim} 906 Where \textit{XXX} is one of $\lbrace ecb, cbc, ctr, cfb, ofb \rbrace$. 907 908 In all cases, \textit{len} is the size of the buffer (as number of octets) to encrypt or decrypt. The CTR, OFB and CFB modes are order sensitive but not 909 chunk sensitive. That is you can encrypt \textit{ABCDEF} in three calls like \textit{AB}, \textit{CD}, \textit{EF} or two like \textit{ABCDE} and \textit{F} 910 and end up with the same ciphertext. However, encrypting \textit{ABC} and \textit{DABC} will result in different ciphertexts. All 911 five of the modes will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} on success from the encrypt or decrypt functions. 912 913 In the ECB and CBC cases, \textit{len} must be a multiple of the ciphers block size. In the CBC case, you must manually pad the end of your message (either with 914 zeroes or with whatever your protocol requires). 915 916 To decrypt in either mode, perform the setup like before (recall you have to fetch the IV value you used), and use the decrypt routine on all of the blocks. 917 918 \subsection{IV Manipulation} 919 To change or read the IV of a previously initialized chaining mode use the following two functions. 920 \index{cbc\_setiv()} \index{cbc\_getiv()} \index{ofb\_setiv()} \index{ofb\_getiv()} \index{cfb\_setiv()} \index{cfb\_getiv()} 921 \index{ctr\_setiv()} \index{ctr\_getiv()} 922 \begin{verbatim} 923 int XXX_getiv(unsigned char *IV, 924 unsigned long *len, 925 symmetric_XXX *XXX); 926 927 int XXX_setiv(const unsigned char *IV, 928 unsigned long len, 929 symmetric_XXX *XXX); 930 \end{verbatim} 931 932 The XXX\_getiv() functions will read the IV out of the chaining mode and store it into \textit{IV} along with the length of the IV 933 stored in \textit{len}. The XXX\_setiv will initialize the chaining mode state as if the original IV were the new IV specified. The length 934 of the IV passed in must be the size of the ciphers block size. 935 936 The XXX\_setiv() functions are handy if you wish to change the IV without re--keying the cipher. 937 938 What the \textit{setiv} function will do depends on the mode being changed. In CBC mode, the new IV replaces the existing IV as if it 939 were the last ciphertext block. In CFB mode, the IV is encrypted as if it were the prior encrypted pad. In CTR mode, the IV is encrypted without 940 first incrementing it (regardless of the LTC\_RFC\_3686 flag presence). In F8 mode, the IV is encrypted and becomes the new pad. It does not change 941 the salted IV, and is only meant to allow seeking within a session. In LRW, it changes the tweak, forcing a computation of the tweak pad, allowing for 942 seeking within the session. In OFB mode, the IV is encrypted and becomes the new pad. 943 944 \subsection{Stream Termination} 945 To terminate an open stream call the done function. 946 947 \index{ecb\_done()} \index{cbc\_done()}\index{cfb\_done()}\index{ofb\_done()} \index{ctr\_done()} 948 \begin{verbatim} 949 int XXX_done(symmetric_XXX *XXX); 950 \end{verbatim} 951 952 This will terminate the stream (by terminating the cipher) and return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if successful. 953 954 \newpage 955 \subsection{Examples} 956 \begin{small} 957 \begin{verbatim} 958 #include <tomcrypt.h> 959 int main(void) 960 { 961 unsigned char key[16], IV[16], buffer[512]; 962 symmetric_CTR ctr; 963 int x, err; 964 965 /* register twofish first */ 966 if (register_cipher(&twofish_desc) == -1) { 967 printf("Error registering cipher.\n"); 968 return -1; 969 } 970 971 /* somehow fill out key and IV */ 972 973 /* start up CTR mode */ 974 if ((err = ctr_start( 975 find_cipher("twofish"), /* index of desired cipher */ 976 IV, /* the initial vector */ 977 key, /* the secret key */ 978 16, /* length of secret key (16 bytes) */ 979 0, /* 0 == default # of rounds */ 980 CTR_COUNTER_LITTLE_ENDIAN, /* Little endian counter */ 981 &ctr) /* where to store the CTR state */ 982 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 983 printf("ctr_start error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 984 return -1; 985 } 986 987 /* somehow fill buffer than encrypt it */ 988 if ((err = ctr_encrypt( buffer, /* plaintext */ 989 buffer, /* ciphertext */ 990 sizeof(buffer), /* length of plaintext pt */ 991 &ctr) /* CTR state */ 992 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 993 printf("ctr_encrypt error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 994 return -1; 995 } 996 997 /* make use of ciphertext... */ 998 999 /* now we want to decrypt so let's use ctr_setiv */ 1000 if ((err = ctr_setiv( IV, /* the initial IV we gave to ctr_start */ 1001 16, /* the IV is 16 bytes long */ 1002 &ctr) /* the ctr state we wish to modify */ 1003 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 1004 printf("ctr_setiv error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1005 return -1; 1006 } 1007 1008 if ((err = ctr_decrypt( buffer, /* ciphertext */ 1009 buffer, /* plaintext */ 1010 sizeof(buffer), /* length of plaintext */ 1011 &ctr) /* CTR state */ 1012 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 1013 printf("ctr_decrypt error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1014 return -1; 1015 } 1016 1017 /* terminate the stream */ 1018 if ((err = ctr_done(&ctr)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1019 printf("ctr_done error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1020 return -1; 1021 } 1022 1023 /* clear up and return */ 1024 zeromem(key, sizeof(key)); 1025 zeromem(&ctr, sizeof(ctr)); 1026 1027 return 0; 1028 } 1029 \end{verbatim} 1030 \end{small} 1031 1032 \subsection{LRW Mode} 1033 LRW mode is a cipher mode which is meant for indexed encryption like used to handle storage media. It is meant to have efficient seeking and overcome the 1034 security problems of ECB mode while not increasing the storage requirements. It is used much like any other chaining mode except with two key differences. 1035 1036 The key is specified as two strings the first key $K_1$ is the (normally AES) key and can be any length (typically 16, 24 or 32 octets long). The second key 1037 $K_2$ is the \textit{tweak} key and is always 16 octets long. The tweak value is \textbf{NOT} a nonce or IV value it must be random and secret. 1038 1039 To initialize LRW mode use: 1040 1041 \index{lrw\_start()} 1042 \begin{verbatim} 1043 int lrw_start( int cipher, 1044 const unsigned char *IV, 1045 const unsigned char *key, 1046 int keylen, 1047 const unsigned char *tweak, 1048 int num_rounds, 1049 symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1050 \end{verbatim} 1051 1052 This will initialize the LRW context with the given (16 octet) \textit{IV}, cipher $K_1$ \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets and the (16 octet) $K_2$ \textit{tweak}. 1053 While LRW was specified to be used only with AES, LibTomCrypt will allow any 128--bit block cipher to be specified as indexed by \textit{cipher}. The 1054 number of rounds for the block cipher \textit{num\_rounds} can be 0 to use the default number of rounds for the given cipher. 1055 1056 To process data use the following functions: 1057 1058 \index{lrw\_encrypt()} \index{lrw\_decrypt()} 1059 \begin{verbatim} 1060 int lrw_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt, 1061 unsigned char *ct, 1062 unsigned long len, 1063 symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1064 1065 int lrw_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct, 1066 unsigned char *pt, 1067 unsigned long len, 1068 symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1069 \end{verbatim} 1070 1071 These will encrypt (or decrypt) the plaintext to the ciphertext buffer (or vice versa). The length is specified by \textit{len} in octets but must be a multiple 1072 of 16. The LRW code uses a fast tweak update such that consecutive blocks are encrypted faster than if random seeking where used. 1073 1074 To manipulate the IV use the following functions: 1075 1076 \index{lrw\_getiv()} \index{lrw\_setiv()} 1077 \begin{verbatim} 1078 int lrw_getiv(unsigned char *IV, 1079 unsigned long *len, 1080 symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1081 1082 int lrw_setiv(const unsigned char *IV, 1083 unsigned long len, 1084 symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1085 \end{verbatim} 1086 These will get or set the 16--octet IV. Note that setting the IV is the same as \textit{seeking} and unlike other modes is not a free operation. It requires 1087 updating the entire tweak which is slower than sequential use. Avoid seeking excessively in performance constrained code. 1088 1089 To terminate the LRW state use the following: 1090 1091 \index{lrw\_done()} 1092 \begin{verbatim} 1093 int lrw_done(symmetric_LRW *lrw); 1094 \end{verbatim} 1095 1096 \subsection{F8 Mode} 1097 \index{F8 Mode} 1098 The F8 Chaining mode (see RFC 3711 for instance) is yet another chaining mode for block ciphers. It behaves much like CTR mode in that it XORs a keystream 1099 against the plaintext to encrypt. F8 mode comes with the additional twist that the counter value is secret, encrypted by a \textit{salt key}. We 1100 initialize F8 mode with the following function call: 1101 1102 \index{f8\_start()} 1103 \begin{verbatim} 1104 int f8_start( int cipher, 1105 const unsigned char *IV, 1106 const unsigned char *key, 1107 int keylen, 1108 const unsigned char *salt_key, 1109 int skeylen, 1110 int num_rounds, 1111 symmetric_F8 *f8); 1112 \end{verbatim} 1113 This will start the F8 mode state using \textit{key} as the secret key, \textit{IV} as the counter. It uses the \textit{salt\_key} as IV encryption key 1114 (\textit{m} in the RFC 3711). The salt\_key can be shorter than the secret key but it should not be longer. 1115 1116 To encrypt or decrypt data we use the following two functions: 1117 1118 \index{f8\_encrypt()} \index{f8\_decrypt()} 1119 \begin{verbatim} 1120 int f8_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt, 1121 unsigned char *ct, 1122 unsigned long len, 1123 symmetric_F8 *f8); 1124 1125 int f8_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct, 1126 unsigned char *pt, 1127 unsigned long len, 1128 symmetric_F8 *f8); 1129 \end{verbatim} 1130 These will encrypt or decrypt a variable length array of bytes using the F8 mode state specified. The length is specified in bytes and does not have to be a multiple 1131 of the ciphers block size. 1132 1133 To change or retrieve the current counter IV value use the following functions: 1134 \index{f8\_getiv()} \index{f8\_setiv()} 1135 \begin{verbatim} 1136 int f8_getiv(unsigned char *IV, 1137 unsigned long *len, 1138 symmetric_F8 *f8); 1139 1140 int f8_setiv(const unsigned char *IV, 1141 unsigned long len, 1142 symmetric_F8 *f8); 1143 \end{verbatim} 1144 These work with the current IV value only and not the encrypted IV value specified during the call to f8\_start(). The purpose of these two functions is to be 1145 able to seek within a current session only. If you want to change the session IV you will have to call f8\_done() and then start a new state with 1146 f8\_start(). 1147 1148 To terminate an F8 state call the following function: 1149 1150 \index{f8\_done()} 1151 \begin{verbatim} 1152 int f8_done(symmetric_F8 *f8); 1153 \end{verbatim} 1154 1155 \vfil 1156 \mysection{Encrypt and Authenticate Modes} 1157 1158 \subsection{EAX Mode} 1159 LibTomCrypt provides support for a mode called EAX\footnote{See 1160 M. Bellare, P. Rogaway, D. Wagner, A Conventional Authenticated-Encryption Mode.} in a manner similar to the way it was intended to be used 1161 by the designers. First, a short description of what EAX mode is before we explain how to use it. EAX is a mode that requires a cipher, 1162 CTR and OMAC support and provides encryption and 1163 authentication\footnote{Note that since EAX only requires OMAC and CTR you may use \textit{encrypt only} cipher descriptors with this mode.}. 1164 It is initialized with a random \textit{nonce} that can be shared publicly, a \textit{header} which can be fixed and public, and a random secret symmetric key. 1165 1166 The \textit{header} data is meant to be meta--data associated with a stream that isn't private (e.g., protocol messages). It can 1167 be added at anytime during an EAX stream, and is part of the authentication tag. That is, changes in the meta-data can be detected by changes in the output tag. 1168 1169 The mode can then process plaintext producing ciphertext as well as compute a partial checksum. The actual checksum 1170 called a \textit{tag} is only emitted when the message is finished. In the interim, the user can process any arbitrary 1171 sized message block to send to the recipient as ciphertext. This makes the EAX mode especially suited for streaming modes 1172 of operation. 1173 1174 The mode is initialized with the following function. 1175 \index{eax\_init()} 1176 \begin{verbatim} 1177 int eax_init( eax_state *eax, 1178 int cipher, 1179 const unsigned char *key, 1180 unsigned long keylen, 1181 const unsigned char *nonce, 1182 unsigned long noncelen, 1183 const unsigned char *header, 1184 unsigned long headerlen); 1185 \end{verbatim} 1186 1187 Where \textit{eax} is the EAX state. The \textit{cipher} parameter is the index of the desired cipher in the descriptor table. 1188 The \textit{key} parameter is the shared secret symmetric key of length \textit{keylen} octets. The \textit{nonce} parameter is the 1189 random public string of length \textit{noncelen} octets. The \textit{header} parameter is the random (or fixed or \textbf{NULL}) header for the 1190 message of length \textit{headerlen} octets. 1191 1192 When this function completes, the \textit{eax} state will be initialized such that you can now either have data decrypted or 1193 encrypted in EAX mode. Note: if \textit{headerlen} is zero you may pass \textit{header} as \textbf{NULL} to indicate there is no initial header data. 1194 1195 To encrypt or decrypt data in a streaming mode use the following. 1196 \index{eax\_encrypt()} \index{eax\_decrypt()} 1197 \begin{verbatim} 1198 int eax_encrypt( eax_state *eax, 1199 const unsigned char *pt, 1200 unsigned char *ct, 1201 unsigned long length); 1202 1203 int eax_decrypt( eax_state *eax, 1204 const unsigned char *ct, 1205 unsigned char *pt, 1206 unsigned long length); 1207 \end{verbatim} 1208 The function \textit{eax\_encrypt} will encrypt the bytes in \textit{pt} of \textit{length} octets, and store the ciphertext in 1209 \textit{ct}. Note: \textit{ct} and \textit{pt} may be the same region in memory. This function will also send the ciphertext 1210 through the OMAC function. The function \textit{eax\_decrypt} decrypts \textit{ct}, and stores it in \textit{pt}. This also allows 1211 \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} to be the same region in memory. 1212 1213 You cannot both encrypt or decrypt with the same \textit{eax} context. For bi--directional communication you will need to initialize 1214 two EAX contexts (preferably with different headers and nonces). 1215 1216 Note: both of these functions allow you to send the data in any granularity but the order is important. While 1217 the eax\_init() function allows you to add initial header data to the stream you can also add header data during the 1218 EAX stream with the following. 1219 1220 \index{eax\_addheader()} 1221 \begin{verbatim} 1222 int eax_addheader( eax_state *eax, 1223 const unsigned char *header, 1224 unsigned long length); 1225 \end{verbatim} 1226 This will add the \textit{length} octet from \textit{header} to the given \textit{eax} header. Once the message is finished, the 1227 \textit{tag} (checksum) may be computed with the following function: 1228 1229 \index{eax\_done()} 1230 \begin{verbatim} 1231 int eax_done( eax_state *eax, 1232 unsigned char *tag, 1233 unsigned long *taglen); 1234 \end{verbatim} 1235 This will terminate the EAX state \textit{eax}, and store up to \textit{taglen} bytes of the message tag in \textit{tag}. The function 1236 then stores how many bytes of the tag were written out back in to \textit{taglen}. 1237 1238 The EAX mode code can be tested to ensure it matches the test vectors by calling the following function: 1239 \index{eax\_test()} 1240 \begin{verbatim} 1241 int eax_test(void); 1242 \end{verbatim} 1243 This requires that the AES (or Rijndael) block cipher be registered with the cipher\_descriptor table first. 1244 1245 \begin{verbatim} 1246 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1247 int main(void) 1248 { 1249 int err; 1250 eax_state eax; 1251 unsigned char pt[64], ct[64], nonce[16], key[16], tag[16]; 1252 unsigned long taglen; 1253 1254 if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) { 1255 printf("Error registering Rijndael"); 1256 return EXIT_FAILURE; 1257 } 1258 1259 /* ... make up random nonce and key ... */ 1260 1261 /* initialize context */ 1262 if ((err = eax_init( &eax, /* context */ 1263 find_cipher("rijndael"), /* cipher id */ 1264 nonce, /* the nonce */ 1265 16, /* nonce is 16 bytes */ 1266 "TestApp", /* example header */ 1267 7) /* header length */ 1268 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 1269 printf("Error eax_init: %s", error_to_string(err)); 1270 return EXIT_FAILURE; 1271 } 1272 1273 /* now encrypt data, say in a loop or whatever */ 1274 if ((err = eax_encrypt( &eax, /* eax context */ 1275 pt, /* plaintext (source) */ 1276 ct, /* ciphertext (destination) */ 1277 sizeof(pt) /* size of plaintext */ 1278 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 1279 printf("Error eax_encrypt: %s", error_to_string(err)); 1280 return EXIT_FAILURE; 1281 } 1282 1283 /* finish message and get authentication tag */ 1284 taglen = sizeof(tag); 1285 if ((err = eax_done( &eax, /* eax context */ 1286 tag, /* where to put tag */ 1287 &taglen /* length of tag space */ 1288 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 1289 printf("Error eax_done: %s", error_to_string(err)); 1290 return EXIT_FAILURE; 1291 } 1292 1293 /* now we have the authentication tag in "tag" and 1294 * it's taglen bytes long */ 1295 } 1296 \end{verbatim} 1297 1298 You can also perform an entire EAX state on a block of memory in a single function call with the 1299 following functions. 1300 1301 1302 \index{eax\_encrypt\_authenticate\_memory} \index{eax\_decrypt\_verify\_memory} 1303 \begin{verbatim} 1304 int eax_encrypt_authenticate_memory( 1305 int cipher, 1306 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 1307 const unsigned char *nonce, unsigned long noncelen, 1308 const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen, 1309 const unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 1310 unsigned char *ct, 1311 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen); 1312 1313 int eax_decrypt_verify_memory( 1314 int cipher, 1315 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 1316 const unsigned char *nonce, unsigned long noncelen, 1317 const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen, 1318 const unsigned char *ct, unsigned long ctlen, 1319 unsigned char *pt, 1320 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long taglen, 1321 int *res); 1322 \end{verbatim} 1323 1324 Both essentially just call eax\_init() followed by eax\_encrypt() (or eax\_decrypt() respectively) and eax\_done(). The parameters 1325 have the same meaning as with those respective functions. 1326 1327 The only difference is eax\_decrypt\_verify\_memory() does not emit a tag. Instead you pass it a tag as input and it compares it against 1328 the tag it computed while decrypting the message. If the tags match then it stores a $1$ in \textit{res}, otherwise it stores a $0$. 1329 1330 \subsection{OCB Mode} 1331 LibTomCrypt provides support for a mode called OCB\footnote{See 1332 P. Rogaway, M. Bellare, J. Black, T. Krovetz, \textit{OCB: A Block Cipher Mode of Operation for Efficient Authenticated Encryption}.} 1333 . OCB is an encryption protocol that simultaneously provides authentication. It is slightly faster to use than EAX mode 1334 but is less flexible. Let's review how to initialize an OCB context. 1335 1336 \index{ocb\_init()} 1337 \begin{verbatim} 1338 int ocb_init( ocb_state *ocb, 1339 int cipher, 1340 const unsigned char *key, 1341 unsigned long keylen, 1342 const unsigned char *nonce); 1343 \end{verbatim} 1344 1345 This will initialize the \textit{ocb} context using cipher descriptor \textit{cipher}. It will use a \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} 1346 and the random \textit{nonce}. Note that \textit{nonce} must be a random (public) string the same length as the block ciphers 1347 block size (e.g. 16 bytes for AES). 1348 1349 This mode has no \textit{Associated Data} like EAX mode does which means you cannot authenticate metadata along with the stream. 1350 To encrypt or decrypt data use the following. 1351 1352 \index{ocb\_encrypt()} \index{ocb\_decrypt()} 1353 \begin{verbatim} 1354 int ocb_encrypt( ocb_state *ocb, 1355 const unsigned char *pt, 1356 unsigned char *ct); 1357 1358 int ocb_decrypt( ocb_state *ocb, 1359 const unsigned char *ct, 1360 unsigned char *pt); 1361 \end{verbatim} 1362 1363 This will encrypt (or decrypt for the latter) a fixed length of data from \textit{pt} to \textit{ct} (vice versa for the latter). 1364 They assume that \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} are the same size as the block cipher's block size. Note that you cannot call 1365 both functions given a single \textit{ocb} state. For bi-directional communication you will have to initialize two \textit{ocb} 1366 states (with different nonces). Also \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} may point to the same location in memory. 1367 1368 \subsubsection{State Termination} 1369 1370 When you are finished encrypting the message you call the following function to compute the tag. 1371 1372 \index{ocb\_done\_encrypt()} 1373 \begin{verbatim} 1374 int ocb_done_encrypt( ocb_state *ocb, 1375 const unsigned char *pt, 1376 unsigned long ptlen, 1377 unsigned char *ct, 1378 unsigned char *tag, 1379 unsigned long *taglen); 1380 \end{verbatim} 1381 1382 This will terminate an encrypt stream \textit{ocb}. If you have trailing bytes of plaintext that will not complete a block 1383 you can pass them here. This will also encrypt the \textit{ptlen} bytes in \textit{pt} and store them in \textit{ct}. It will also 1384 store up to \textit{taglen} bytes of the tag into \textit{tag}. 1385 1386 Note that \textit{ptlen} must be less than or equal to the block size of block cipher chosen. Also note that if you have 1387 an input message equal to the length of the block size then you pass the data here (not to ocb\_encrypt()) only. 1388 1389 To terminate a decrypt stream and compared the tag you call the following. 1390 1391 \index{ocb\_done\_decrypt()} 1392 \begin{verbatim} 1393 int ocb_done_decrypt( ocb_state *ocb, 1394 const unsigned char *ct, 1395 unsigned long ctlen, 1396 unsigned char *pt, 1397 const unsigned char *tag, 1398 unsigned long taglen, 1399 int *res); 1400 \end{verbatim} 1401 Similarly to the previous function you can pass trailing message bytes into this function. This will compute the 1402 tag of the message (internally) and then compare it against the \textit{taglen} bytes of \textit{tag} provided. By default 1403 \textit{res} is set to zero. If all \textit{taglen} bytes of \textit{tag} can be verified then \textit{res} is set to one (authenticated 1404 message). 1405 1406 \subsubsection{Packet Functions} 1407 To make life simpler the following two functions are provided for memory bound OCB. 1408 1409 %\index{ocb\_encrypt\_authenticate\_memory()} 1410 \begin{verbatim} 1411 int ocb_encrypt_authenticate_memory( 1412 int cipher, 1413 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 1414 const unsigned char *nonce, 1415 const unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 1416 unsigned char *ct, 1417 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen); 1418 \end{verbatim} 1419 1420 This will OCB encrypt the message \textit{pt} of length \textit{ptlen}, and store the ciphertext in \textit{ct}. The length \textit{ptlen} 1421 can be any arbitrary length. 1422 1423 \index{ocb\_decrypt\_verify\_memory()} 1424 \begin{verbatim} 1425 int ocb_decrypt_verify_memory( 1426 int cipher, 1427 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 1428 const unsigned char *nonce, 1429 const unsigned char *ct, unsigned long ctlen, 1430 unsigned char *pt, 1431 const unsigned char *tag, unsigned long taglen, 1432 int *res); 1433 \end{verbatim} 1434 1435 Similarly, this will OCB decrypt, and compare the internally computed tag against the tag provided. \textit{res} is set 1436 appropriately. 1437 1438 \subsection{CCM Mode} 1439 CCM is a NIST proposal for encrypt + authenticate that is centered around using AES (or any 16--byte cipher) as a primitive. Unlike EAX and OCB mode, 1440 it is only meant for \textit{packet} mode where the length of the input is known in advance. Since it is a packet mode function, CCM only has one 1441 function that performs the protocol. 1442 1443 \index{ccm\_memory()} 1444 \begin{verbatim} 1445 int ccm_memory( 1446 int cipher, 1447 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 1448 symmetric_key *uskey, 1449 const unsigned char *nonce, unsigned long noncelen, 1450 const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen, 1451 unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 1452 unsigned char *ct, 1453 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen, 1454 int direction); 1455 \end{verbatim} 1456 1457 This performs the \textit{CCM} operation on the data. The \textit{cipher} variable indicates which cipher in the descriptor table to use. It must have a 1458 16--byte block size for CCM. 1459 1460 The key can be specified in one of two fashions. First, it can be passed as an array of octets in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen}. Alternatively, 1461 it can be passed in as a previously scheduled key in \textit{uskey}. The latter fashion saves time when the same key is used for multiple packets. If 1462 \textit{uskey} is not \textbf{NULL}, then \textit{key} may be \textbf{NULL} (and vice-versa). 1463 1464 The nonce or salt is \textit{nonce} of length \textit{noncelen} octets. The header is meta--data you want to send with the message but not have 1465 encrypted, it is stored in \textit{header} of length \textit{headerlen} octets. The header can be zero octets long (if $headerlen = 0$ then 1466 you can pass \textit{header} as \textbf{NULL}). 1467 1468 The plaintext is stored in \textit{pt}, and the ciphertext in \textit{ct}. The length of both are expected to be equal and is passed in as \textit{ptlen}. It is 1469 allowable that $pt = ct$. The \textit{direction} variable indicates whether encryption (direction $=$ \textbf{CCM\_ENCRYPT}) or 1470 decryption (direction $=$ \textbf{CCM\_DECRYPT}) is to be performed. 1471 1472 As implemented, this version of CCM cannot handle header or plaintext data longer than $2^{32} - 1$ octets long. 1473 1474 You can test the implementation of CCM with the following function. 1475 1476 \index{ccm\_test()} 1477 \begin{verbatim} 1478 int ccm_test(void); 1479 \end{verbatim} 1480 1481 This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if the CCM routine passes known test vectors. It requires AES or Rijndael to be registered previously, otherwise it will 1482 return \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}. 1483 1484 \subsubsection{CCM Example} 1485 The following is a sample of how to call CCM. 1486 1487 \begin{small} 1488 \begin{verbatim} 1489 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1490 int main(void) 1491 { 1492 unsigned char key[16], nonce[12], pt[32], ct[32], 1493 tag[16], tagcp[16]; 1494 unsigned long taglen; 1495 int err; 1496 1497 /* register cipher */ 1498 register_cipher(&aes_desc); 1499 1500 /* somehow fill key, nonce, pt */ 1501 1502 /* encrypt it */ 1503 taglen = sizeof(tag); 1504 if ((err = 1505 ccm_memory(find_cipher("aes"), 1506 key, 16, /* 128-bit key */ 1507 NULL, /* not prescheduled */ 1508 nonce, 12, /* 96-bit nonce */ 1509 NULL, 0, /* no header */ 1510 pt, 32, /* 32-byte plaintext */ 1511 ct, /* ciphertext */ 1512 tag, &taglen, 1513 CCM_ENCRYPT)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1514 printf("ccm_memory error %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1515 return -1; 1516 } 1517 /* ct[0..31] and tag[0..15] now hold the output */ 1518 1519 /* decrypt it */ 1520 taglen = sizeof(tagcp); 1521 if ((err = 1522 ccm_memory(find_cipher("aes"), 1523 key, 16, /* 128-bit key */ 1524 NULL, /* not prescheduled */ 1525 nonce, 12, /* 96-bit nonce */ 1526 NULL, 0, /* no header */ 1527 ct, 32, /* 32-byte ciphertext */ 1528 pt, /* plaintext */ 1529 tagcp, &taglen, 1530 CCM_DECRYPT)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1531 printf("ccm_memory error %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1532 return -1; 1533 } 1534 1535 /* now pt[0..31] should hold the original plaintext, 1536 tagcp[0..15] and tag[0..15] should have the same contents */ 1537 } 1538 \end{verbatim} 1539 \end{small} 1540 1541 \subsection{GCM Mode} 1542 Galois counter mode is an IEEE proposal for authenticated encryption (also it is a planned NIST standard). Like EAX and OCB mode, it can be used in a streaming capacity 1543 however, unlike EAX it cannot accept \textit{additional authentication data} (meta--data) after plaintext has been processed. This mode also only works with 1544 block ciphers with a 16--byte block. 1545 1546 A GCM stream is meant to be processed in three modes, one after another. First, the initial vector (per session) data is processed. This should be 1547 unique to every session. Next, the the optional additional authentication data is processed, and finally the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction). 1548 1549 \subsubsection{Initialization} 1550 To initialize the GCM context with a secret key call the following function. 1551 1552 \index{gcm\_init()} 1553 \begin{verbatim} 1554 int gcm_init( gcm_state *gcm, 1555 int cipher, 1556 const unsigned char *key, 1557 int keylen); 1558 \end{verbatim} 1559 This initializes the GCM state \textit{gcm} for the given cipher indexed by \textit{cipher}, with a secret key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets. The cipher 1560 chosen must have a 16--byte block size (e.g., AES). 1561 1562 \subsubsection{Initial Vector} 1563 After the state has been initialized (or reset) the next step is to add the session (or packet) initial vector. It should be unique per packet encrypted. 1564 1565 \index{gcm\_add\_iv()} 1566 \begin{verbatim} 1567 int gcm_add_iv( gcm_state *gcm, 1568 const unsigned char *IV, 1569 unsigned long IVlen); 1570 \end{verbatim} 1571 This adds the initial vector octets from \textit{IV} of length \textit{IVlen} to the GCM state \textit{gcm}. You can call this function as many times as required 1572 to process the entire IV. 1573 1574 Note: the GCM protocols provides a \textit{shortcut} for 12--byte IVs where no pre-processing is to be done. If you want to minimize per packet latency it is ideal 1575 to only use 12--byte IVs. You can just increment it like a counter for each packet. 1576 1577 \subsubsection{Additional Authentication Data} 1578 After the entire IV has been processed, the additional authentication data can be processed. Unlike the IV, a packet/session does not require additional 1579 authentication data (AAD) for security. The AAD is meant to be used as side--channel data you want to be authenticated with the packet. Note: once 1580 you begin adding AAD to the GCM state you cannot return to adding IV data until the state has been reset. 1581 1582 \index{gcm\_add\_aad()} 1583 \begin{verbatim} 1584 int gcm_add_aad( gcm_state *gcm, 1585 const unsigned char *adata, 1586 unsigned long adatalen); 1587 \end{verbatim} 1588 This adds the additional authentication data \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} to the GCM state \textit{gcm}. 1589 1590 \subsubsection{Plaintext Processing} 1591 After the AAD has been processed, the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction) can be processed. 1592 1593 \index{gcm\_process()} 1594 \begin{verbatim} 1595 int gcm_process( gcm_state *gcm, 1596 unsigned char *pt, 1597 unsigned long ptlen, 1598 unsigned char *ct, 1599 int direction); 1600 \end{verbatim} 1601 This processes message data where \textit{pt} is the plaintext and \textit{ct} is the ciphertext. The length of both are equal and stored in \textit{ptlen}. Depending on 1602 the mode \textit{pt} is the input and \textit{ct} is the output (or vice versa). When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{GCM\_ENCRYPT} the plaintext is read, 1603 encrypted and stored in the ciphertext buffer. When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{GCM\_DECRYPT} the opposite occurs. 1604 1605 \subsubsection{State Termination} 1606 To terminate a GCM state and retrieve the message authentication tag call the following function. 1607 1608 \index{gcm\_done()} 1609 \begin{verbatim} 1610 int gcm_done( gcm_state *gcm, 1611 unsigned char *tag, 1612 unsigned long *taglen); 1613 \end{verbatim} 1614 This terminates the GCM state \textit{gcm} and stores the tag in \textit{tag} of length \textit{taglen} octets. 1615 1616 \subsubsection{State Reset} 1617 The call to gcm\_init() will perform considerable pre--computation (when \textbf{GCM\_TABLES} is defined) and if you're going to be dealing with a lot of packets 1618 it is very costly to have to call it repeatedly. To aid in this endeavour, the reset function has been provided. 1619 1620 \index{gcm\_reset()} 1621 \begin{verbatim} 1622 int gcm_reset(gcm_state *gcm); 1623 \end{verbatim} 1624 1625 This will reset the GCM state \textit{gcm} to the state that gcm\_init() left it. The user would then call gcm\_add\_iv(), gcm\_add\_aad(), etc. 1626 1627 \subsubsection{One--Shot Packet} 1628 To process a single packet under any given key the following helper function can be used. 1629 1630 \index{gcm\_memory()} 1631 \begin{verbatim} 1632 int gcm_memory( 1633 int cipher, 1634 const unsigned char *key, 1635 unsigned long keylen, 1636 const unsigned char *IV, unsigned long IVlen, 1637 const unsigned char *adata, unsigned long adatalen, 1638 unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 1639 unsigned char *ct, 1640 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen, 1641 int direction); 1642 \end{verbatim} 1643 1644 This will initialize the GCM state with the given key, IV and AAD value then proceed to encrypt or decrypt the message text and store the final 1645 message tag. The definition of the variables is the same as it is for all the manual functions. 1646 1647 If you are processing many packets under the same key you shouldn't use this function as it invokes the pre--computation with each call. 1648 1649 \subsubsection{Example Usage} 1650 The following is an example usage of how to use GCM over multiple packets with a shared secret key. 1651 1652 \begin{small} 1653 \begin{verbatim} 1654 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1655 1656 int send_packet(const unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 1657 const unsigned char *iv, unsigned long ivlen, 1658 const unsigned char *aad, unsigned long aadlen, 1659 gcm_state *gcm) 1660 { 1661 int err; 1662 unsigned long taglen; 1663 unsigned char tag[16]; 1664 1665 /* reset the state */ 1666 if ((err = gcm_reset(gcm)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1667 return err; 1668 } 1669 1670 /* Add the IV */ 1671 if ((err = gcm_add_iv(gcm, iv, ivlen)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1672 return err; 1673 } 1674 1675 /* Add the AAD (note: aad can be NULL if aadlen == 0) */ 1676 if ((err = gcm_add_aad(gcm, aad, aadlen)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1677 return err; 1678 } 1679 1680 /* process the plaintext */ 1681 if ((err = 1682 gcm_process(gcm, pt, ptlen, pt, GCM_ENCRYPT)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1683 return err; 1684 } 1685 1686 /* Finish up and get the MAC tag */ 1687 taglen = sizeof(tag); 1688 if ((err = gcm_done(gcm, tag, &taglen)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1689 return err; 1690 } 1691 1692 /* ... send a header describing the lengths ... */ 1693 1694 /* depending on the protocol and how IV is 1695 * generated you may have to send it too... */ 1696 send(socket, iv, ivlen, 0); 1697 1698 /* send the aad */ 1699 send(socket, aad, aadlen, 0); 1700 1701 /* send the ciphertext */ 1702 send(socket, pt, ptlen, 0); 1703 1704 /* send the tag */ 1705 send(socket, tag, taglen, 0); 1706 1707 return CRYPT_OK; 1708 } 1709 1710 int main(void) 1711 { 1712 gcm_state gcm; 1713 unsigned char key[16], IV[12], pt[PACKET_SIZE]; 1714 int err, x; 1715 unsigned long ptlen; 1716 1717 /* somehow fill key/IV with random values */ 1718 1719 /* register AES */ 1720 register_cipher(&aes_desc); 1721 1722 /* init the GCM state */ 1723 if ((err = 1724 gcm_init(&gcm, find_cipher("aes"), key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1725 whine_and_pout(err); 1726 } 1727 1728 /* handle us some packets */ 1729 for (;;) { 1730 ptlen = make_packet_we_want_to_send(pt); 1731 1732 /* use IV as counter (12 byte counter) */ 1733 for (x = 11; x >= 0; x--) { 1734 if (++IV[x]) { 1735 break; 1736 } 1737 } 1738 1739 if ((err = send_packet(pt, ptlen, iv, 12, NULL, 0, &gcm)) 1740 != CRYPT_OK) { 1741 whine_and_pout(err); 1742 } 1743 } 1744 return EXIT_SUCCESS; 1745 } 1746 \end{verbatim} 1747 \end{small} 1748 1749 \chapter{One-Way Cryptographic Hash Functions} 1750 \mysection{Core Functions} 1751 Like the ciphers, there are hash core functions and a universal data type to hold the hash state called \textit{hash\_state}. To initialize hash 1752 XXX (where XXX is the name) call: 1753 \index{Hash Functions} 1754 \begin{verbatim} 1755 void XXX_init(hash_state *md); 1756 \end{verbatim} 1757 1758 This simply sets up the hash to the default state governed by the specifications of the hash. To add data to the message being hashed call: 1759 \begin{verbatim} 1760 int XXX_process( hash_state *md, 1761 const unsigned char *in, 1762 unsigned long inlen); 1763 \end{verbatim} 1764 Essentially all hash messages are virtually infinitely\footnote{Most hashes are limited to $2^{64}$ bits or 2,305,843,009,213,693,952 bytes.} long message which 1765 are buffered. The data can be passed in any sized chunks as long as the order of the bytes are the same the message digest (hash output) will be the same. For example, 1766 this means that: 1767 \begin{verbatim} 1768 md5_process(&md, "hello ", 6); 1769 md5_process(&md, "world", 5); 1770 \end{verbatim} 1771 Will produce the same message digest as the single call: 1772 \index{Message Digest} 1773 \begin{verbatim} 1774 md5_process(&md, "hello world", 11); 1775 \end{verbatim} 1776 1777 To finally get the message digest (the hash) call: 1778 \begin{verbatim} 1779 int XXX_done( hash_state *md, 1780 unsigned char *out); 1781 \end{verbatim} 1782 1783 This function will finish up the hash and store the result in the \textit{out} array. You must ensure that \textit{out} is long 1784 enough for the hash in question. Often hashes are used to get keys for symmetric ciphers so the \textit{XXX\_done()} functions 1785 will wipe the \textit{md} variable before returning automatically. 1786 1787 To test a hash function call: 1788 \begin{verbatim} 1789 int XXX_test(void); 1790 \end{verbatim} 1791 1792 This will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the hash matches the test vectors, otherwise it returns an error code. An 1793 example snippet that hashes a message with md5 is given below. 1794 \begin{small} 1795 \begin{verbatim} 1796 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1797 int main(void) 1798 { 1799 hash_state md; 1800 unsigned char *in = "hello world", out[16]; 1801 1802 /* setup the hash */ 1803 md5_init(&md); 1804 1805 /* add the message */ 1806 md5_process(&md, in, strlen(in)); 1807 1808 /* get the hash in out[0..15] */ 1809 md5_done(&md, out); 1810 1811 return 0; 1812 } 1813 \end{verbatim} 1814 \end{small} 1815 1816 \mysection{Hash Descriptors} 1817 Like the set of ciphers, the set of hashes have descriptors as well. They are stored in an array called \textit{hash\_descriptor} and 1818 are defined by: 1819 \begin{verbatim} 1820 struct _hash_descriptor { 1821 char *name; 1822 1823 unsigned long hashsize; /* digest output size in bytes */ 1824 unsigned long blocksize; /* the block size the hash uses */ 1825 1826 void (*init) (hash_state *hash); 1827 1828 int (*process)( hash_state *hash, 1829 const unsigned char *in, 1830 unsigned long inlen); 1831 1832 int (*done) (hash_state *hash, unsigned char *out); 1833 1834 int (*test) (void); 1835 }; 1836 \end{verbatim} 1837 1838 \index{find\_hash()} 1839 The \textit{name} member is the name of the hash function (all lowercase). The \textit{hashsize} member is the size of the digest output 1840 in bytes, while \textit{blocksize} is the size of blocks the hash expects to the compression function. Technically, this detail is not important 1841 for high level developers but is useful to know for performance reasons. 1842 1843 The \textit{init} member initializes the hash, \textit{process} passes data through the hash, \textit{done} terminates the hash and retrieves the 1844 digest. The \textit{test} member tests the hash against the specified test vectors. 1845 1846 There is a function to search the array as well called \textit{int find\_hash(char *name)}. It returns -1 if the hash is not found, otherwise, the 1847 position in the descriptor table of the hash. 1848 1849 In addition, there is also find\_hash\_oid() which finds a hash by the ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER string. 1850 \index{find\_hash\_oid()} 1851 \begin{verbatim} 1852 int find_hash_oid(const unsigned long *ID, unsigned long IDlen); 1853 \end{verbatim} 1854 1855 You can use the table to indirectly call a hash function that is chosen at run-time. For example: 1856 \begin{small} 1857 \begin{verbatim} 1858 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1859 int main(void) 1860 { 1861 unsigned char buffer[100], hash[MAXBLOCKSIZE]; 1862 int idx, x; 1863 hash_state md; 1864 1865 /* register hashes .... */ 1866 if (register_hash(&md5_desc) == -1) { 1867 printf("Error registering MD5.\n"); 1868 return -1; 1869 } 1870 1871 /* register other hashes ... */ 1872 1873 /* prompt for name and strip newline */ 1874 printf("Enter hash name: \n"); 1875 fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), stdin); 1876 buffer[strlen(buffer) - 1] = 0; 1877 1878 /* get hash index */ 1879 idx = find_hash(buffer); 1880 if (idx == -1) { 1881 printf("Invalid hash name!\n"); 1882 return -1; 1883 } 1884 1885 /* hash input until blank line */ 1886 hash_descriptor[idx].init(&md); 1887 while (fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), stdin) != NULL) 1888 hash_descriptor[idx].process(&md, buffer, strlen(buffer)); 1889 hash_descriptor[idx].done(&md, hash); 1890 1891 /* dump to screen */ 1892 for (x = 0; x < hash_descriptor[idx].hashsize; x++) 1893 printf("%02x ", hash[x]); 1894 printf("\n"); 1895 return 0; 1896 } 1897 \end{verbatim} 1898 \end{small} 1899 1900 Note the usage of \textbf{MAXBLOCKSIZE}. In LibTomCrypt, no symmetric block, key or hash digest is larger than \textbf{MAXBLOCKSIZE} in 1901 length. This provides a simple size you can set your automatic arrays to that will not get overrun. 1902 1903 There are three helper functions to make working with hashes easier. The first is a function to hash a buffer, and produce the digest in a single 1904 function call. 1905 1906 \index{hash\_memory()} 1907 \begin{verbatim} 1908 int hash_memory( int hash, 1909 const unsigned char *in, 1910 unsigned long inlen, 1911 unsigned char *out, 1912 unsigned long *outlen); 1913 \end{verbatim} 1914 1915 This will hash the data pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}. The hash used is indexed by the \textit{hash} parameter. The message 1916 digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size. 1917 1918 The next helper function allows for the hashing of a file based on a file name. 1919 \index{hash\_file()} 1920 \begin{verbatim} 1921 int hash_file( int hash, 1922 const char *fname, 1923 unsigned char *out, 1924 unsigned long *outlen); 1925 \end{verbatim} 1926 1927 This will hash the file named by \textit{fname} using the hash indexed by \textit{hash}. The file named in this function call must be readable by the 1928 user owning the process performing the request. This function can be omitted by the \textbf{LTC\_NO\_FILE} define, which forces it to return \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP} 1929 when it is called. The message digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size. 1930 1931 \index{hash\_filehandle()} 1932 \begin{verbatim} 1933 int hash_filehandle( int hash, 1934 FILE *in, 1935 unsigned char *out, 1936 unsigned long *outlen); 1937 \end{verbatim} 1938 1939 This will hash the file identified by the handle \textit{in} using the hash indexed by \textit{hash}. This will begin hashing from the current file pointer position, and 1940 will not rewind the file pointer when finished. This function can be omitted by the \textbf{LTC\_NO\_FILE} define, which forces it to return \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP} 1941 when it is called. The message digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size. 1942 1943 To perform the above hash with md5 the following code could be used: 1944 \begin{small} 1945 \begin{verbatim} 1946 #include <tomcrypt.h> 1947 int main(void) 1948 { 1949 int idx, err; 1950 unsigned long len; 1951 unsigned char out[MAXBLOCKSIZE]; 1952 1953 /* register the hash */ 1954 if (register_hash(&md5_desc) == -1) { 1955 printf("Error registering MD5.\n"); 1956 return -1; 1957 } 1958 1959 /* get the index of the hash */ 1960 idx = find_hash("md5"); 1961 1962 /* call the hash */ 1963 len = sizeof(out); 1964 if ((err = 1965 hash_memory(idx, "hello world", 11, out, &len)) != CRYPT_OK) { 1966 printf("Error hashing data: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 1967 return -1; 1968 } 1969 return 0; 1970 } 1971 \end{verbatim} 1972 \end{small} 1973 1974 \subsection{Hash Registration} 1975 Similar to the cipher descriptor table you must register your hash algorithms before you can use them. These functions 1976 work exactly like those of the cipher registration code. The functions are: 1977 \index{register\_hash()} \index{unregister\_hash()} 1978 \begin{verbatim} 1979 int register_hash(const struct _hash_descriptor *hash); 1980 1981 int unregister_hash(const struct _hash_descriptor *hash); 1982 \end{verbatim} 1983 1984 The following hashes are provided as of this release within the LibTomCrypt library: 1985 \index{Hash descriptor table} 1986 1987 \begin{figure}[here] 1988 \begin{center} 1989 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} 1990 \hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor Name} & \textbf{Size of Message Digest (bytes)} \\ 1991 \hline WHIRLPOOL & whirlpool\_desc & 64 \\ 1992 \hline SHA-512 & sha512\_desc & 64 \\ 1993 \hline SHA-384 & sha384\_desc & 48 \\ 1994 \hline RIPEMD-320 & rmd160\_desc & 40 \\ 1995 \hline SHA-256 & sha256\_desc & 32 \\ 1996 \hline RIPEMD-256 & rmd160\_desc & 32 \\ 1997 \hline SHA-224 & sha224\_desc & 28 \\ 1998 \hline TIGER-192 & tiger\_desc & 24 \\ 1999 \hline SHA-1 & sha1\_desc & 20 \\ 2000 \hline RIPEMD-160 & rmd160\_desc & 20 \\ 2001 \hline RIPEMD-128 & rmd128\_desc & 16 \\ 2002 \hline MD5 & md5\_desc & 16 \\ 2003 \hline MD4 & md4\_desc & 16 \\ 2004 \hline MD2 & md2\_desc & 16 \\ 2005 \hline 2006 \end{tabular} 2007 \end{center} 2008 \caption{Built--In Software Hashes} 2009 \end{figure} 2010 \vfil 2011 2012 \mysection{Cipher Hash Construction} 2013 \index{Cipher Hash Construction} 2014 An addition to the suite of hash functions is the \textit{Cipher Hash Construction} or \textit{CHC} mode. In this mode 2015 applicable block ciphers (such as AES) can be turned into hash functions that other LTC functions can use. In 2016 particular this allows a cryptosystem to be designed using very few moving parts. 2017 2018 In order to use the CHC system the developer will have to take a few extra steps. First the \textit{chc\_desc} hash 2019 descriptor must be registered with register\_hash(). At this point the CHC hash cannot be used to hash 2020 data. While it is in the hash system you still have to tell the CHC code which cipher to use. This is accomplished 2021 via the chc\_register() function. 2022 2023 \index{chc\_register()} 2024 \begin{verbatim} 2025 int chc_register(int cipher); 2026 \end{verbatim} 2027 2028 A cipher has to be registered with CHC (and also in the cipher descriptor tables with 2029 register\_cipher()). The chc\_register() function will bind a cipher to the CHC system. Only one cipher can 2030 be bound to the CHC hash at a time. There are additional requirements for the system to work. 2031 2032 \begin{enumerate} 2033 \item The cipher must have a block size greater than 64--bits. 2034 \item The cipher must allow an input key the size of the block size. 2035 \end{enumerate} 2036 2037 Example of using CHC with the AES block cipher. 2038 2039 \begin{verbatim} 2040 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2041 int main(void) 2042 { 2043 int err; 2044 2045 /* register cipher and hash */ 2046 if (register_cipher(&aes_enc_desc) == -1) { 2047 printf("Could not register cipher\n"); 2048 return EXIT_FAILURE; 2049 } 2050 if (register_hash(&chc_desc) == -1) { 2051 printf("Could not register hash\n"); 2052 return EXIT_FAILURE; 2053 } 2054 2055 /* start chc with AES */ 2056 if ((err = chc_register(find_cipher("aes"))) != CRYPT_OK) { 2057 printf("Error binding AES to CHC: %s\n", 2058 error_to_string(err)); 2059 } 2060 2061 /* now you can use chc_hash in any LTC function 2062 * [aside from pkcs...] */ 2063 } 2064 \end{verbatim} 2065 2066 2067 \mysection{Notice} 2068 It is highly recommended that you \textbf{not} use the MD4 or MD5 hashes for the purposes of digital signatures or authentication codes. 2069 These hashes are provided for completeness and they still can be used for the purposes of password hashing or one-way accumulators 2070 (e.g. Yarrow). 2071 2072 The other hashes such as the SHA-1, SHA-2 (that includes SHA-512, SHA-384 and SHA-256) and TIGER-192 are still considered secure 2073 for all purposes you would normally use a hash for. 2074 2075 \chapter{Message Authentication Codes} 2076 \mysection{HMAC Protocol} 2077 Thanks to Dobes Vandermeer, the library now includes support for hash based message authentication codes, or HMAC for short. An HMAC 2078 of a message is a keyed authentication code that only the owner of a private symmetric key will be able to verify. The purpose is 2079 to allow an owner of a private symmetric key to produce an HMAC on a message then later verify if it is correct. Any impostor or 2080 eavesdropper will not be able to verify the authenticity of a message. 2081 2082 The HMAC support works much like the normal hash functions except that the initialization routine requires you to pass a key 2083 and its length. The key is much like a key you would pass to a cipher. That is, it is simply an array of octets stored in 2084 unsigned characters. The initialization routine is: 2085 \index{hmac\_init()} 2086 \begin{verbatim} 2087 int hmac_init( hmac_state *hmac, 2088 int hash, 2089 const unsigned char *key, 2090 unsigned long keylen); 2091 \end{verbatim} 2092 The \textit{hmac} parameter is the state for the HMAC code. The \textit{hash} parameter is the index into the descriptor table of the hash you want 2093 to use to authenticate the message. The \textit{key} parameter is the pointer to the array of chars that make up the key. The \textit{keylen} parameter is the 2094 length (in octets) of the key you want to use to authenticate the message. To send octets of a message through the HMAC system you must use the following function: 2095 \index{hmac\_process()} 2096 \begin{verbatim} 2097 int hmac_process( hmac_state *hmac, 2098 const unsigned char *in, 2099 unsigned long inlen); 2100 \end{verbatim} 2101 \textit{hmac} is the HMAC state you are working with. \textit{buf} is the array of octets to send into the HMAC process. \textit{len} is the 2102 number of octets to process. Like the hash process routines you can send the data in arbitrarily sized chunks. When you 2103 are finished with the HMAC process you must call the following function to get the HMAC code: 2104 \index{hmac\_done()} 2105 \begin{verbatim} 2106 int hmac_done( hmac_state *hmac, 2107 unsigned char *out, 2108 unsigned long *outlen); 2109 \end{verbatim} 2110 The \textit{hmac} parameter is the HMAC state you are working with. The \textit{out} parameter is the array of octets where the HMAC code should be stored. 2111 You must set \textit{outlen} to the size of the destination buffer before calling this function. It is updated with the length of the HMAC code 2112 produced (depending on which hash was picked). If \textit{outlen} is less than the size of the message digest (and ultimately 2113 the HMAC code) then the HMAC code is truncated as per FIPS-198 specifications (e.g. take the first \textit{outlen} bytes). 2114 2115 There are two utility functions provided to make using HMACs easier to do. They accept the key and information about the 2116 message (file pointer, address in memory), and produce the HMAC result in one shot. These are useful if you want to avoid 2117 calling the three step process yourself. 2118 2119 \index{hmac\_memory()} 2120 \begin{verbatim} 2121 int hmac_memory( 2122 int hash, 2123 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2124 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 2125 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2126 \end{verbatim} 2127 This will produce an HMAC code for the array of octets in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}. The index into the hash descriptor 2128 table must be provided in \textit{hash}. It uses the key from \textit{key} with a key length of \textit{keylen}. 2129 The result is stored in the array of octets \textit{out} and the length in \textit{outlen}. The value of \textit{outlen} must be set 2130 to the size of the destination buffer before calling this function. Similarly for files there is the following function: 2131 \index{hmac\_file()} 2132 \begin{verbatim} 2133 int hmac_file( 2134 int hash, 2135 const char *fname, 2136 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2137 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2138 \end{verbatim} 2139 \textit{hash} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash you want to use. \textit{fname} is the filename to process. 2140 \textit{key} is the array of octets to use as the key of length \textit{keylen}. \textit{out} is the array of octets where the 2141 result should be stored. 2142 2143 To test if the HMAC code is working there is the following function: 2144 \index{hmac\_test()} 2145 \begin{verbatim} 2146 int hmac_test(void); 2147 \end{verbatim} 2148 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code. Some example code for using the 2149 HMAC system is given below. 2150 2151 \begin{small} 2152 \begin{verbatim} 2153 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2154 int main(void) 2155 { 2156 int idx, err; 2157 hmac_state hmac; 2158 unsigned char key[16], dst[MAXBLOCKSIZE]; 2159 unsigned long dstlen; 2160 2161 /* register SHA-1 */ 2162 if (register_hash(&sha1_desc) == -1) { 2163 printf("Error registering SHA1\n"); 2164 return -1; 2165 } 2166 2167 /* get index of SHA1 in hash descriptor table */ 2168 idx = find_hash("sha1"); 2169 2170 /* we would make up our symmetric key in "key[]" here */ 2171 2172 /* start the HMAC */ 2173 if ((err = hmac_init(&hmac, idx, key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2174 printf("Error setting up hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2175 return -1; 2176 } 2177 2178 /* process a few octets */ 2179 if((err = hmac_process(&hmac, "hello", 5) != CRYPT_OK) { 2180 printf("Error processing hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2181 return -1; 2182 } 2183 2184 /* get result (presumably to use it somehow...) */ 2185 dstlen = sizeof(dst); 2186 if ((err = hmac_done(&hmac, dst, &dstlen)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2187 printf("Error finishing hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2188 return -1; 2189 } 2190 printf("The hmac is %lu bytes long\n", dstlen); 2191 2192 /* return */ 2193 return 0; 2194 } 2195 \end{verbatim} 2196 \end{small} 2197 2198 \mysection{OMAC Support} 2199 \index{OMAC} \index{CMAC} 2200 OMAC\footnote{\url{http://crypt.cis.ibaraki.ac.jp/omac/omac.html}}, which stands for \textit{One-Key CBC MAC} is an 2201 algorithm which produces a Message Authentication Code (MAC) using only a block cipher such as AES. Note: OMAC has been standardized as 2202 CMAC within NIST, for the purposes of this library OMAC and CMAC are synonymous. From an API standpoint, the OMAC routines work much like the 2203 HMAC routines. Instead, in this case a cipher is used instead of a hash. 2204 2205 To start an OMAC state you call 2206 \index{omac\_init()} 2207 \begin{verbatim} 2208 int omac_init( omac_state *omac, 2209 int cipher, 2210 const unsigned char *key, 2211 unsigned long keylen); 2212 \end{verbatim} 2213 The \textit{omac} parameter is the state for the OMAC algorithm. The \textit{cipher} parameter is the index into the cipher\_descriptor table 2214 of the cipher\footnote{The cipher must have a 64 or 128 bit block size. Such as CAST5, Blowfish, DES, AES, Twofish, etc.} you 2215 wish to use. The \textit{key} and \textit{keylen} parameters are the keys used to authenticate the data. 2216 2217 To send data through the algorithm call 2218 \index{omac\_process()} 2219 \begin{verbatim} 2220 int omac_process( omac_state *state, 2221 const unsigned char *in, 2222 unsigned long inlen); 2223 \end{verbatim} 2224 This will send \textit{inlen} bytes from \textit{in} through the active OMAC state \textit{state}. Returns \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if the 2225 function succeeds. The function is not sensitive to the granularity of the data. For example, 2226 2227 \begin{verbatim} 2228 omac_process(&mystate, "hello", 5); 2229 omac_process(&mystate, " world", 6); 2230 \end{verbatim} 2231 2232 Would produce the same result as, 2233 2234 \begin{verbatim} 2235 omac_process(&mystate, "hello world", 11); 2236 \end{verbatim} 2237 2238 When you are done processing the message you can call the following to compute the message tag. 2239 2240 \index{omac\_done()} 2241 \begin{verbatim} 2242 int omac_done( omac_state *state, 2243 unsigned char *out, 2244 unsigned long *outlen); 2245 \end{verbatim} 2246 Which will terminate the OMAC and output the \textit{tag} (MAC) to \textit{out}. Note that unlike the HMAC and other code 2247 \textit{outlen} can be smaller than the default MAC size (for instance AES would make a 16-byte tag). Part of the OMAC 2248 specification states that the output may be truncated. So if you pass in $outlen = 5$ and use AES as your cipher than 2249 the output MAC code will only be five bytes long. If \textit{outlen} is larger than the default size it is set to the default 2250 size to show how many bytes were actually used. 2251 2252 Similar to the HMAC code the file and memory functions are also provided. To OMAC a buffer of memory in one shot use the 2253 following function. 2254 2255 \index{omac\_memory()} 2256 \begin{verbatim} 2257 int omac_memory( 2258 int cipher, 2259 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2260 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 2261 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2262 \end{verbatim} 2263 This will compute the OMAC of \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes and the cipher 2264 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same 2265 rules as omac\_done. 2266 2267 To OMAC a file use 2268 \index{omac\_file()} 2269 \begin{verbatim} 2270 int omac_file( 2271 int cipher, 2272 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2273 const char *filename, 2274 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2275 \end{verbatim} 2276 2277 Which will OMAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes 2278 and the cipher specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with 2279 the same rules as omac\_done. 2280 2281 To test if the OMAC code is working there is the following function: 2282 \index{omac\_test()} 2283 \begin{verbatim} 2284 int omac_test(void); 2285 \end{verbatim} 2286 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code. Some example code for using the 2287 OMAC system is given below. 2288 2289 \begin{small} 2290 \begin{verbatim} 2291 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2292 int main(void) 2293 { 2294 int idx, err; 2295 omac_state omac; 2296 unsigned char key[16], dst[MAXBLOCKSIZE]; 2297 unsigned long dstlen; 2298 2299 /* register Rijndael */ 2300 if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) { 2301 printf("Error registering Rijndael\n"); 2302 return -1; 2303 } 2304 2305 /* get index of Rijndael in cipher descriptor table */ 2306 idx = find_cipher("rijndael"); 2307 2308 /* we would make up our symmetric key in "key[]" here */ 2309 2310 /* start the OMAC */ 2311 if ((err = omac_init(&omac, idx, key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2312 printf("Error setting up omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2313 return -1; 2314 } 2315 2316 /* process a few octets */ 2317 if((err = omac_process(&omac, "hello", 5) != CRYPT_OK) { 2318 printf("Error processing omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2319 return -1; 2320 } 2321 2322 /* get result (presumably to use it somehow...) */ 2323 dstlen = sizeof(dst); 2324 if ((err = omac_done(&omac, dst, &dstlen)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2325 printf("Error finishing omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2326 return -1; 2327 } 2328 printf("The omac is %lu bytes long\n", dstlen); 2329 2330 /* return */ 2331 return 0; 2332 } 2333 \end{verbatim} 2334 \end{small} 2335 2336 \mysection{PMAC Support} 2337 The PMAC\footnote{J.Black, P.Rogaway, \textit{A Block--Cipher Mode of Operation for Parallelizable Message Authentication}} 2338 protocol is another MAC algorithm that relies solely on a symmetric-key block cipher. It uses essentially the same 2339 API as the provided OMAC code. 2340 2341 A PMAC state is initialized with the following. 2342 2343 \index{pmac\_init()} 2344 \begin{verbatim} 2345 int pmac_init( pmac_state *pmac, 2346 int cipher, 2347 const unsigned char *key, 2348 unsigned long keylen); 2349 \end{verbatim} 2350 Which initializes the \textit{pmac} state with the given \textit{cipher} and \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes. The chosen cipher 2351 must have a 64 or 128 bit block size (e.x. AES). 2352 2353 To MAC data simply send it through the process function. 2354 2355 \index{pmac\_process()} 2356 \begin{verbatim} 2357 int pmac_process( pmac_state *state, 2358 const unsigned char *in, 2359 unsigned long inlen); 2360 \end{verbatim} 2361 This will process \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} in the given \textit{state}. The function is not sensitive to the granularity of the 2362 data. For example, 2363 2364 \begin{verbatim} 2365 pmac_process(&mystate, "hello", 5); 2366 pmac_process(&mystate, " world", 6); 2367 \end{verbatim} 2368 2369 Would produce the same result as, 2370 2371 \begin{verbatim} 2372 pmac_process(&mystate, "hello world", 11); 2373 \end{verbatim} 2374 2375 When a complete message has been processed the following function can be called to compute the message tag. 2376 2377 \index{pmac\_done()} 2378 \begin{verbatim} 2379 int pmac_done( pmac_state *state, 2380 unsigned char *out, 2381 unsigned long *outlen); 2382 \end{verbatim} 2383 This will store up to \textit{outlen} bytes of the tag for the given \textit{state} into \textit{out}. Note that if \textit{outlen} is larger 2384 than the size of the tag it is set to the amount of bytes stored in \textit{out}. 2385 2386 Similar to the OMAC code the file and memory functions are also provided. To PMAC a buffer of memory in one shot use the 2387 following function. 2388 2389 \index{pmac\_memory()} 2390 \begin{verbatim} 2391 int pmac_memory( 2392 int cipher, 2393 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2394 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 2395 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2396 \end{verbatim} 2397 This will compute the PMAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher 2398 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same 2399 rules as pmac\_done(). 2400 2401 To PMAC a file use 2402 \index{pmac\_file()} 2403 \begin{verbatim} 2404 int pmac_file( 2405 int cipher, 2406 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2407 const char *filename, 2408 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2409 \end{verbatim} 2410 2411 Which will PMAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, 2412 and the cipher specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with 2413 the same rules as pmac\_done(). 2414 2415 To test if the PMAC code is working there is the following function: 2416 \index{pmac\_test()} 2417 \begin{verbatim} 2418 int pmac_test(void); 2419 \end{verbatim} 2420 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code. 2421 2422 \mysection{Pelican MAC} 2423 Pelican MAC is a new (experimental) MAC by the AES team that uses four rounds of AES as a \textit{mixing function}. It achieves a very high 2424 rate of processing and is potentially very secure. It requires AES to be enabled to function. You do not have to register\_cipher() AES first though 2425 as it calls AES directly. 2426 2427 \index{pelican\_init()} 2428 \begin{verbatim} 2429 int pelican_init( pelican_state *pelmac, 2430 const unsigned char *key, 2431 unsigned long keylen); 2432 \end{verbatim} 2433 This will initialize the Pelican state with the given AES key. Once this has been done you can begin processing data. 2434 2435 \index{pelican\_process()} 2436 \begin{verbatim} 2437 int pelican_process( pelican_state *pelmac, 2438 const unsigned char *in, 2439 unsigned long inlen); 2440 \end{verbatim} 2441 This will process \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} through the Pelican MAC. It's best that you pass in multiples of 16 bytes as it makes the 2442 routine more efficient but you may pass in any length of text. You can call this function as many times as required to process 2443 an entire message. 2444 2445 \index{pelican\_done()} 2446 \begin{verbatim} 2447 int pelican_done(pelican_state *pelmac, unsigned char *out); 2448 \end{verbatim} 2449 This terminates a Pelican MAC and writes the 16--octet tag to \textit{out}. 2450 2451 \subsection{Example} 2452 2453 \begin{verbatim} 2454 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2455 int main(void) 2456 { 2457 pelican_state pelstate; 2458 unsigned char key[32], tag[16]; 2459 int err; 2460 2461 /* somehow initialize a key */ 2462 2463 /* initialize pelican mac */ 2464 if ((err = pelican_init(&pelstate, /* the state */ 2465 key, /* user key */ 2466 32 /* key length in octets */ 2467 )) != CRYPT_OK) { 2468 printf("Error initializing Pelican: %s", 2469 error_to_string(err)); 2470 return EXIT_FAILURE; 2471 } 2472 2473 /* MAC some data */ 2474 if ((err = pelican_process(&pelstate, /* the state */ 2475 "hello world", /* data to mac */ 2476 11 /* length of data */ 2477 )) != CRYPT_OK) { 2478 printf("Error processing Pelican: %s", 2479 error_to_string(err)); 2480 return EXIT_FAILURE; 2481 } 2482 2483 /* Terminate the MAC */ 2484 if ((err = pelican_done(&pelstate,/* the state */ 2485 tag /* where to store the tag */ 2486 )) != CRYPT_OK) { 2487 printf("Error terminating Pelican: %s", 2488 error_to_string(err)); 2489 return EXIT_FAILURE; 2490 } 2491 2492 /* tag[0..15] has the MAC output now */ 2493 2494 return EXIT_SUCCESS; 2495 } 2496 \end{verbatim} 2497 2498 \mysection{XCBC-MAC} 2499 As of LibTomCrypt v1.15, XCBC-MAC (RFC 3566) has been provided to support TLS encryption suites. Like OMAC, it computes a message authentication code 2500 by using a cipher in CBC mode. It also uses a single key which it expands into the requisite three keys for the MAC function. A XCBC--MAC state is 2501 initialized with the following function: 2502 2503 \index{xcbc\_init()} 2504 \begin{verbatim} 2505 int xcbc_init( xcbc_state *xcbc, 2506 int cipher, 2507 const unsigned char *key, 2508 unsigned long keylen); 2509 \end{verbatim} 2510 2511 This will initialize the XCBC--MAC state \textit{xcbc}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets. The cipher indicated 2512 by the \textit{cipher} index can be either a 64 or 128--bit block cipher. This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2513 2514 To process data through XCBC--MAC use the following function: 2515 2516 \index{xcbc\_process()} 2517 \begin{verbatim} 2518 int xcbc_process( xcbc_state *state, 2519 const unsigned char *in, 2520 unsigned long inlen); 2521 \end{verbatim} 2522 2523 This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the XCBC--MAC state pointed to by \textit{state}. Like the other MAC functions, 2524 the granularity of the input is not important but the order is. This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2525 2526 To compute the MAC tag value use the following function: 2527 2528 \index{xcbc\_done()} 2529 \begin{verbatim} 2530 int xcbc_done( xcbc_state *state, 2531 unsigned char *out, 2532 unsigned long *outlen); 2533 \end{verbatim} 2534 2535 This will retrieve the XCBC--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{state}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{out}. The \textit{outlen} parameter 2536 specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when the function returns. This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2537 2538 Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier. The following functions are provided: 2539 2540 \index{xcbc\_memory()} 2541 \begin{verbatim} 2542 int xcbc_memory( 2543 int cipher, 2544 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2545 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 2546 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2547 \end{verbatim} 2548 This will compute the XCBC--MAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher 2549 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as xcbc\_done(). 2550 2551 To xcbc a file use 2552 \index{xcbc\_file()} 2553 \begin{verbatim} 2554 int xcbc_file( 2555 int cipher, 2556 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2557 const char *filename, 2558 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2559 \end{verbatim} 2560 2561 Which will XCBC--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher 2562 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as xcbc\_done(). 2563 2564 2565 To test XCBC--MAC for RFC 3566 compliance use the following function: 2566 2567 \index{xcbc\_test()} 2568 \begin{verbatim} 2569 int xcbc_test(void); 2570 \end{verbatim} 2571 2572 This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. This requires the AES or Rijndael descriptor be previously registered, otherwise, it will return 2573 \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}. 2574 2575 \mysection{F9--MAC} 2576 The F9--MAC is yet another CBC--MAC variant proposed for the 3GPP standard. Originally specified to be used with the KASUMI block cipher, it can also be used 2577 with other ciphers. For LibTomCrypt, the F9--MAC code can use any cipher. 2578 2579 \subsection{Usage Notice} 2580 F9--MAC differs slightly from the other MAC functions in that it requires the caller to perform the final message padding. The padding quite simply is a direction 2581 bit followed by a 1 bit and enough zeros to make the message a multiple of the cipher block size. If the message is byte aligned, the padding takes on the form of 2582 a single 0x40 or 0xC0 byte followed by enough 0x00 bytes to make the message proper multiple. 2583 2584 If the user simply wants a MAC function (hint: use OMAC) padding with a single 0x40 byte should be sufficient for security purposes and still be reasonably compatible 2585 with F9--MAC. 2586 2587 \subsection{F9--MAC Functions} 2588 A F9--MAC state is initialized with the following function: 2589 \index{f9\_init()} 2590 \begin{verbatim} 2591 int f9_init( f9_state *f9, 2592 int cipher, 2593 const unsigned char *key, 2594 unsigned long keylen); 2595 \end{verbatim} 2596 2597 This will initialize the F9--MAC state \textit{f9}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets. The cipher indicated 2598 by the \textit{cipher} index can be either a 64 or 128--bit block cipher. This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2599 2600 To process data through F9--MAC use the following function: 2601 \index{f9\_process()} 2602 \begin{verbatim} 2603 int f9_process( f9_state *state, 2604 const unsigned char *in, 2605 unsigned long inlen); 2606 \end{verbatim} 2607 2608 This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the F9--MAC state pointed to by \textit{state}. Like the other MAC functions, 2609 the granularity of the input is not important but the order is. This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2610 2611 To compute the MAC tag value use the following function: 2612 2613 \index{f9\_done()} 2614 \begin{verbatim} 2615 int f9_done( f9_state *state, 2616 unsigned char *out, 2617 unsigned long *outlen); 2618 \end{verbatim} 2619 2620 This will retrieve the F9--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{state}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{out}. The \textit{outlen} parameter 2621 specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when the function returns. This will return 2622 \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. 2623 2624 Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier. The following functions are provided: 2625 2626 \index{f9\_memory()} 2627 \begin{verbatim} 2628 int f9_memory( 2629 int cipher, 2630 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2631 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 2632 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2633 \end{verbatim} 2634 This will compute the F9--MAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher 2635 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as f9\_done(). 2636 2637 To F9--MAC a file use 2638 \index{f9\_file()} 2639 \begin{verbatim} 2640 int f9_file( 2641 int cipher, 2642 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 2643 const char *filename, 2644 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 2645 \end{verbatim} 2646 2647 Which will F9--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher 2648 specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table. It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as f9\_done(). 2649 2650 2651 To test f9--MAC for RFC 3566 compliance use the following function: 2652 2653 \index{f9\_test()} 2654 \begin{verbatim} 2655 int f9_test(void); 2656 \end{verbatim} 2657 2658 This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success. This requires the AES or Rijndael descriptor be previously registered, otherwise, it will return 2659 \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}. 2660 2661 \chapter{Pseudo-Random Number Generators} 2662 \mysection{Core Functions} 2663 The library provides an array of core functions for Pseudo-Random Number Generators (PRNGs) as well. A cryptographic PRNG is 2664 used to expand a shorter bit string into a longer bit string. PRNGs are used wherever random data is required such as Public Key (PK) 2665 key generation. There is a universal structure called \textit{prng\_state}. To initialize a PRNG call: 2666 \index{PRNG start} 2667 \begin{verbatim} 2668 int XXX_start(prng_state *prng); 2669 \end{verbatim} 2670 2671 This will setup the PRNG for future use and not seed it. In order for the PRNG to be cryptographically useful you must give it 2672 entropy. Ideally you'd have some OS level source to tap like in UNIX. To add entropy to the PRNG call: 2673 \index{PRNG add\_entropy} 2674 \begin{verbatim} 2675 int XXX_add_entropy(const unsigned char *in, 2676 unsigned long inlen, 2677 prng_state *prng); 2678 \end{verbatim} 2679 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the entropy was accepted. Once you think you have enough entropy you call another 2680 function to put the entropy into action. 2681 \index{PRNG ready} 2682 \begin{verbatim} 2683 int XXX_ready(prng_state *prng); 2684 \end{verbatim} 2685 2686 Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if it is ready. Finally to actually read bytes call: 2687 \index{PRNG read} 2688 \begin{verbatim} 2689 unsigned long XXX_read(unsigned char *out, 2690 unsigned long outlen, 2691 prng_state *prng); 2692 \end{verbatim} 2693 2694 Which returns the number of bytes read from the PRNG. When you are finished with a PRNG state you call 2695 the following. 2696 2697 \index{PRNG done} 2698 \begin{verbatim} 2699 void XXX_done(prng_state *prng); 2700 \end{verbatim} 2701 2702 This will terminate a PRNG state and free any memory (if any) allocated. To export a PRNG state 2703 so that you can later resume the PRNG call the following. 2704 2705 \index{PRNG export} 2706 \begin{verbatim} 2707 int XXX_export(unsigned char *out, 2708 unsigned long *outlen, 2709 prng_state *prng); 2710 \end{verbatim} 2711 2712 This will write a \textit{PRNG state} to the buffer \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} bytes. The idea of 2713 the export is meant to be used as a \textit{seed file}. That is, when the program starts up there will not likely 2714 be that much entropy available. To import a state to seed a PRNG call the following function. 2715 2716 \index{PRNG import} 2717 \begin{verbatim} 2718 int XXX_import(const unsigned char *in, 2719 unsigned long inlen, 2720 prng_state *prng); 2721 \end{verbatim} 2722 2723 This will call the start and add\_entropy functions of the given PRNG. It will use the state in 2724 \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} as the initial seed. You must pass the same seed length as was exported 2725 by the corresponding export function. 2726 2727 Note that importing a state will not \textit{resume} the PRNG from where it left off. That is, if you export 2728 a state, emit (say) 8 bytes and then import the previously exported state the next 8 bytes will not 2729 specifically equal the 8 bytes you generated previously. 2730 2731 When a program is first executed the normal course of operation is: 2732 2733 \begin{enumerate} 2734 \item Gather entropy from your sources for a given period of time or number of events. 2735 \item Start, use your entropy via add\_entropy and ready the PRNG yourself. 2736 \end{enumerate} 2737 2738 When your program is finished you simply call the export function and save the state to a medium (disk, 2739 flash memory, etc). The next time your application starts up you can detect the state, feed it to the 2740 import function and go on your way. It is ideal that (as soon as possible) after start up you export a 2741 fresh state. This helps in the case that the program aborts or the machine is powered down without 2742 being given a chance to exit properly. 2743 2744 Note that even if you have a state to import it is important to add new entropy to the state. However, 2745 there is less pressure to do so. 2746 2747 To test a PRNG for operational conformity call the following functions. 2748 2749 \index{PRNG test} 2750 \begin{verbatim} 2751 int XXX_test(void); 2752 \end{verbatim} 2753 2754 This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if PRNG is operating properly. 2755 2756 \subsection{Remarks} 2757 2758 It is possible to be adding entropy and reading from a PRNG at the same time. For example, if you first seed the PRNG 2759 and call ready() you can now read from it. You can also keep adding new entropy to it. The new entropy will not be used 2760 in the PRNG until ready() is called again. This allows the PRNG to be used and re-seeded at the same time. No real error 2761 checking is guaranteed to see if the entropy is sufficient, or if the PRNG is even in a ready state before reading. 2762 2763 \subsection{Example} 2764 Below is a simple snippet to read 10 bytes from Yarrow. It is important to note that this snippet is {\bf NOT} secure since 2765 the entropy added is not random. 2766 2767 \begin{verbatim} 2768 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2769 int main(void) 2770 { 2771 prng_state prng; 2772 unsigned char buf[10]; 2773 int err; 2774 2775 /* start it */ 2776 if ((err = yarrow_start(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2777 printf("Start error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2778 } 2779 /* add entropy */ 2780 if ((err = yarrow_add_entropy("hello world", 11, &prng)) 2781 != CRYPT_OK) { 2782 printf("Add_entropy error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2783 } 2784 /* ready and read */ 2785 if ((err = yarrow_ready(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2786 printf("Ready error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2787 } 2788 printf("Read %lu bytes from yarrow\n", 2789 yarrow_read(buf, sizeof(buf), &prng)); 2790 return 0; 2791 } 2792 \end{verbatim} 2793 2794 \mysection{PRNG Descriptors} 2795 \index{PRNG Descriptor} 2796 PRNGs have descriptors that allow plugin driven functions to be created using PRNGs. The plugin descriptors are stored in the structure \textit{prng\_descriptor}. The 2797 format of an element is: 2798 \begin{verbatim} 2799 struct _prng_descriptor { 2800 char *name; 2801 int export_size; /* size in bytes of exported state */ 2802 2803 int (*start) (prng_state *); 2804 2805 int (*add_entropy)(const unsigned char *, unsigned long, 2806 prng_state *); 2807 2808 int (*ready) (prng_state *); 2809 2810 unsigned long (*read)(unsigned char *, unsigned long len, 2811 prng_state *); 2812 2813 void (*done)(prng_state *); 2814 2815 int (*export)(unsigned char *, unsigned long *, prng_state *); 2816 2817 int (*import)(const unsigned char *, unsigned long, prng_state *); 2818 2819 int (*test)(void); 2820 }; 2821 \end{verbatim} 2822 2823 To find a PRNG in the descriptor table the following function can be used: 2824 \index{find\_prng()} 2825 \begin{verbatim} 2826 int find_prng(const char *name); 2827 \end{verbatim} 2828 This will search the PRNG descriptor table for the PRNG named \textit{name}. It will return -1 if the PRNG is not found, otherwise, it returns 2829 the index into the descriptor table. 2830 2831 Just like the ciphers and hashes, you must register your prng before you can use it. The two functions provided work exactly as those for the cipher registry functions. 2832 They are the following: 2833 \index{register\_prng()} \index{unregister\_prng()} 2834 \begin{verbatim} 2835 int register_prng(const struct _prng_descriptor *prng); 2836 int unregister_prng(const struct _prng_descriptor *prng); 2837 \end{verbatim} 2838 2839 The register function will register the PRNG, and return the index into the table where it was placed (or -1 for error). It will avoid registering the same 2840 descriptor twice, and will return the index of the current placement in the table if the caller attempts to register it more than once. The unregister function 2841 will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if the PRNG was found and removed. Otherwise, it returns \textbf{CRYPT\_ERROR}. 2842 2843 \subsection{PRNGs Provided} 2844 \begin{figure}[here] 2845 \begin{center} 2846 \begin{small} 2847 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|l|} 2848 \hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor} & \textbf{Usage} \\ 2849 \hline Yarrow & yarrow\_desc & Fast short-term PRNG \\ 2850 \hline Fortuna & fortuna\_desc & Fast long-term PRNG (recommended) \\ 2851 \hline RC4 & rc4\_desc & Stream Cipher \\ 2852 \hline SOBER-128 & sober128\_desc & Stream Cipher (also very fast PRNG) \\ 2853 \hline 2854 \end{tabular} 2855 \end{small} 2856 \end{center} 2857 \caption{List of Provided PRNGs} 2858 \end{figure} 2859 2860 \subsubsection{Yarrow} 2861 Yarrow is fast PRNG meant to collect an unspecified amount of entropy from sources 2862 (keyboard, mouse, interrupts, etc), and produce an unbounded string of random bytes. 2863 2864 \textit{Note:} This PRNG is still secure for most tasks but is no longer recommended. Users 2865 should use Fortuna instead. 2866 2867 \subsubsection{Fortuna} 2868 2869 Fortuna is a fast attack tolerant and more thoroughly designed PRNG suitable for long term 2870 usage. It is faster than the default implementation of Yarrow\footnote{Yarrow has been implemented 2871 to work with most cipher and hash combos based on which you have chosen to build into the library.} while 2872 providing more security. 2873 2874 Fortuna is slightly less flexible than Yarrow in the sense that it only works with the AES block cipher 2875 and SHA--256 hash function. Technically, Fortuna will work with any block cipher that accepts a 256--bit 2876 key, and any hash that produces at least a 256--bit output. However, to make the implementation simpler 2877 it has been fixed to those choices. 2878 2879 Fortuna is more secure than Yarrow in the sense that attackers who learn parts of the entropy being 2880 added to the PRNG learn far less about the state than that of Yarrow. Without getting into to many 2881 details Fortuna has the ability to recover from state determination attacks where the attacker starts 2882 to learn information from the PRNGs output about the internal state. Yarrow on the other hand, cannot 2883 recover from that problem until new entropy is added to the pool and put to use through the ready() function. 2884 2885 \subsubsection{RC4} 2886 2887 RC4 is an old stream cipher that can also double duty as a PRNG in a pinch. You key RC4 by 2888 calling add\_entropy(), and setup the key by calling ready(). You can only add up to 256 bytes via 2889 add\_entropy(). 2890 2891 When you read from RC4, the output is XOR'ed against your buffer you provide. In this manner, you can use rc4\_read() 2892 as an encrypt (and decrypt) function. 2893 2894 You really should not use RC4. This is not because RC4 is weak, (though biases are known to exist) but simply due to 2895 the fact that faster alternatives exist. 2896 2897 \subsubsection{SOBER-128} 2898 2899 SOBER--128 is a stream cipher designed by the QUALCOMM Australia team. Like RC4, you key it by 2900 calling add\_entropy(). There is no need to call ready() for this PRNG as it does not do anything. 2901 2902 Note: this cipher has several oddities about how it operates. The first call to add\_entropy() sets the cipher's key. 2903 Every other time call to the add\_entropy() function sets the cipher's IV variable. The IV mechanism allows you to 2904 encrypt several messages with the same key, and not re--use the same key material. 2905 2906 Unlike Yarrow and Fortuna, all of the entropy (and hence security) of this algorithm rests in the data 2907 you pass it on the \textbf{first} call to add\_entropy(). All buffers sent to add\_entropy() must have a length 2908 that is a multiple of four bytes. 2909 2910 Like RC4, the output of SOBER--128 is XOR'ed against the buffer you provide it. In this manner, you can use 2911 sober128\_read() as an encrypt (and decrypt) function. 2912 2913 Since SOBER-128 has a fixed keying scheme, and is very fast (faster than RC4) the ideal usage of SOBER-128 is to 2914 key it from the output of Fortuna (or Yarrow), and use it to encrypt messages. It is also ideal for 2915 simulations which need a high quality (and fast) stream of bytes. 2916 2917 \subsubsection{Example Usage} 2918 \begin{small} 2919 \begin{verbatim} 2920 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2921 int main(void) 2922 { 2923 prng_state prng; 2924 unsigned char buf[32]; 2925 int err; 2926 2927 if ((err = rc4_start(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2928 printf("RC4 init error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2929 exit(-1); 2930 } 2931 2932 /* use "key" as the key */ 2933 if ((err = rc4_add_entropy("key", 3, &prng)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2934 printf("RC4 add entropy error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2935 exit(-1); 2936 } 2937 2938 /* setup RC4 for use */ 2939 if ((err = rc4_ready(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) { 2940 printf("RC4 ready error: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 2941 exit(-1); 2942 } 2943 2944 /* encrypt buffer */ 2945 strcpy(buf,"hello world"); 2946 if (rc4_read(buf, 11, &prng) != 11) { 2947 printf("RC4 read error\n"); 2948 exit(-1); 2949 } 2950 return 0; 2951 } 2952 \end{verbatim} 2953 \end{small} 2954 To decrypt you have to do the exact same steps. 2955 2956 \mysection{The Secure RNG} 2957 \index{Secure RNG} 2958 An RNG is related to a PRNG in many ways, except that it does not expand a smaller seed to get the data. They generate their random bits 2959 by performing some computation on fresh input bits. Possibly the hardest thing to get correctly in a cryptosystem is the 2960 PRNG. Computers are deterministic that try hard not to stray from pre--determined paths. This makes gathering entropy needed to seed a PRNG 2961 a hard task. 2962 2963 There is one small function that may help on certain platforms: 2964 \index{rng\_get\_bytes()} 2965 \begin{verbatim} 2966 unsigned long rng_get_bytes( 2967 unsigned char *buf, 2968 unsigned long len, 2969 void (*callback)(void)); 2970 \end{verbatim} 2971 2972 Which will try one of three methods of getting random data. The first is to open the popular \textit{/dev/random} device which 2973 on most *NIX platforms provides cryptographic random bits\footnote{This device is available in Windows through the Cygwin compiler suite. It emulates \textit{/dev/random} via the Microsoft CSP.}. 2974 The second method is to try the Microsoft Cryptographic Service Provider, and read the RNG. The third method is an ANSI C 2975 clock drift method that is also somewhat popular but gives bits of lower entropy. The \textit{callback} parameter is a pointer to a function that returns void. It is 2976 used when the slower ANSI C RNG must be used so the calling application can still work. This is useful since the ANSI C RNG has a throughput of roughly three 2977 bytes a second. The callback pointer may be set to {\bf NULL} to avoid using it if you do not want to. The function returns the number of bytes actually read from 2978 any RNG source. There is a function to help setup a PRNG as well: 2979 \index{rng\_make\_prng()} 2980 \begin{verbatim} 2981 int rng_make_prng( int bits, 2982 int wprng, 2983 prng_state *prng, 2984 void (*callback)(void)); 2985 \end{verbatim} 2986 This will try to initialize the prng with a state of at least \textit{bits} of entropy. The \textit{callback} parameter works much like 2987 the callback in \textit{rng\_get\_bytes()}. It is highly recommended that you use this function to setup your PRNGs unless you have a 2988 platform where the RNG does not work well. Example usage of this function is given below: 2989 2990 \begin{small} 2991 \begin{verbatim} 2992 #include <tomcrypt.h> 2993 int main(void) 2994 { 2995 ecc_key mykey; 2996 prng_state prng; 2997 int err; 2998 2999 /* register yarrow */ 3000 if (register_prng(&yarrow_desc) == -1) { 3001 printf("Error registering Yarrow\n"); 3002 return -1; 3003 } 3004 3005 /* setup the PRNG */ 3006 if ((err = rng_make_prng(128, find_prng("yarrow"), &prng, NULL)) 3007 != CRYPT_OK) { 3008 printf("Error setting up PRNG, %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 3009 return -1; 3010 } 3011 3012 /* make a 192-bit ECC key */ 3013 if ((err = ecc_make_key(&prng, find_prng("yarrow"), 24, &mykey)) 3014 != CRYPT_OK) { 3015 printf("Error making key: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 3016 return -1; 3017 } 3018 return 0; 3019 } 3020 \end{verbatim} 3021 \end{small} 3022 3023 \subsection{The Secure PRNG Interface} 3024 It is possible to access the secure RNG through the PRNG interface, and in turn use it within dependent functions such 3025 as the PK API. This simplifies the cryptosystem on platforms where the secure RNG is fast. The secure PRNG never 3026 requires to be started, that is you need not call the start, add\_entropy, or ready functions. For example, consider 3027 the previous example using this PRNG. 3028 3029 \begin{small} 3030 \begin{verbatim} 3031 #include <tomcrypt.h> 3032 int main(void) 3033 { 3034 ecc_key mykey; 3035 int err; 3036 3037 /* register SPRNG */ 3038 if (register_prng(&sprng_desc) == -1) { 3039 printf("Error registering SPRNG\n"); 3040 return -1; 3041 } 3042 3043 /* make a 192-bit ECC key */ 3044 if ((err = ecc_make_key(NULL, find_prng("sprng"), 24, &mykey)) 3045 != CRYPT_OK) { 3046 printf("Error making key: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 3047 return -1; 3048 } 3049 return 0; 3050 } 3051 \end{verbatim} 3052 \end{small} 3053 3054 \chapter{RSA Public Key Cryptography} 3055 3056 \mysection{Introduction} 3057 RSA wrote the PKCS \#1 specifications which detail RSA Public Key Cryptography. In the specifications are 3058 padding algorithms for encryption and signatures. The standard includes the \textit{v1.5} and \textit{v2.1} algorithms. 3059 To simplify matters a little the v2.1 encryption and signature padding algorithms are called OAEP and PSS respectively. 3060 3061 \mysection{PKCS \#1 Padding} 3062 PKCS \#1 v1.5 padding is so simple that both signature and encryption padding are performed by the same function. Note: the 3063 signature padding does \textbf{not} include the ASN.1 padding required. That is performed by the rsa\_sign\_hash\_ex() function 3064 documented later on in this chapter. 3065 3066 \subsection{PKCS \#1 v1.5 Encoding} 3067 The following function performs PKCS \#1 v1.5 padding: 3068 \index{pkcs\_1\_v1\_5\_encode()} 3069 \begin{verbatim} 3070 int pkcs_1_v1_5_encode( 3071 const unsigned char *msg, 3072 unsigned long msglen, 3073 int block_type, 3074 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3075 prng_state *prng, 3076 int prng_idx, 3077 unsigned char *out, 3078 unsigned long *outlen); 3079 \end{verbatim} 3080 3081 This will encode the message pointed to by \textit{msg} of length \textit{msglen} octets. The \textit{block\_type} parameter must be set to 3082 \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} to perform encryption padding. It must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA} to perform signature padding. The \textit{modulus\_bitlen} 3083 parameter indicates the length of the modulus in bits. The padded data is stored in \textit{out} with a length of \textit{outlen} octets. The output will not be 3084 longer than the modulus which helps allocate the correct output buffer size. 3085 3086 Only encryption padding requires a PRNG. When performing signature padding the \textit{prng\_idx} parameter may be left to zero as it is not checked for validity. 3087 3088 \subsection{PKCS \#1 v1.5 Decoding} 3089 The following function performs PKCS \#1 v1.5 de--padding: 3090 \index{pkcs\_1\_v1\_5\_decode()} 3091 \begin{verbatim} 3092 int pkcs_1_v1_5_decode( 3093 const unsigned char *msg, 3094 unsigned long msglen, 3095 int block_type, 3096 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3097 unsigned char *out, 3098 unsigned long *outlen, 3099 int *is_valid); 3100 \end{verbatim} 3101 \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA} 3102 This will remove the PKCS padding data pointed to by \textit{msg} of length \textit{msglen}. The decoded data is stored in \textit{out} of length 3103 \textit{outlen}. If the padding is valid, a 1 is stored in \textit{is\_valid}, otherwise, a 0 is stored. The \textit{block\_type} parameter must be set to either 3104 \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} or \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA} depending on whether encryption or signature padding is being removed. 3105 3106 \mysection{PKCS \#1 v2.1 Encryption} 3107 PKCS \#1 RSA Encryption amounts to OAEP padding of the input message followed by the modular exponentiation. As far as this portion of 3108 the library is concerned we are only dealing with th OAEP padding of the message. 3109 3110 \subsection{OAEP Encoding} 3111 3112 The following function performs PKCS \#1 v2.1 encryption padding: 3113 3114 \index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode()} 3115 \begin{alltt} 3116 int pkcs_1_oaep_encode( 3117 const unsigned char *msg, 3118 unsigned long msglen, 3119 const unsigned char *lparam, 3120 unsigned long lparamlen, 3121 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3122 prng_state *prng, 3123 int prng_idx, 3124 int hash_idx, 3125 unsigned char *out, 3126 unsigned long *outlen); 3127 \end{alltt} 3128 3129 This accepts \textit{msg} as input of length \textit{msglen} which will be OAEP padded. The \textit{lparam} variable is an additional system specific 3130 tag that can be applied to the encoding. This is useful to identify which system encoded the message. If no variance is desired then 3131 \textit{lparam} can be set to \textbf{NULL}. 3132 3133 OAEP encoding requires the length of the modulus in bits in order to calculate the size of the output. This is passed as the parameter 3134 \textit{modulus\_bitlen}. \textit{hash\_idx} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash desired. PKCS \#1 allows any hash to be 3135 used but both the encoder and decoder must use the same hash in order for this to succeed. The size of hash output affects the maximum 3136 sized input message. \textit{prng\_idx} and \textit{prng} are the random number generator arguments required to randomize the padding process. 3137 The padded message is stored in \textit{out} along with the length in \textit{outlen}. 3138 3139 If $h$ is the length of the hash and $m$ the length of the modulus (both in octets) then the maximum payload for \textit{msg} is 3140 $m - 2h - 2$. For example, with a $1024$--bit RSA key and SHA--1 as the hash the maximum payload is $86$ bytes. 3141 3142 Note that when the message is padded it still has not been RSA encrypted. You must pass the output of this function to 3143 rsa\_exptmod() to encrypt it. 3144 3145 \subsection{OAEP Decoding} 3146 3147 \index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_decode()} 3148 \begin{alltt} 3149 int pkcs_1_oaep_decode( 3150 const unsigned char *msg, 3151 unsigned long msglen, 3152 const unsigned char *lparam, 3153 unsigned long lparamlen, 3154 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3155 int hash_idx, 3156 unsigned char *out, 3157 unsigned long *outlen, 3158 int *res); 3159 \end{alltt} 3160 3161 This function decodes an OAEP encoded message and outputs the original message that was passed to the OAEP encoder. \textit{msg} is the 3162 output of pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode() of length \textit{msglen}. \textit{lparam} is the same system variable passed to the OAEP encoder. If it does not 3163 match what was used during encoding this function will not decode the packet. \textit{modulus\_bitlen} is the size of the RSA modulus in bits 3164 and must match what was used during encoding. Similarly the \textit{hash\_idx} index into the hash descriptor table must match what was used 3165 during encoding. 3166 3167 If the function succeeds it decodes the OAEP encoded message into \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} and stores a 3168 $1$ in \textit{res}. If the packet is invalid it stores $0$ in \textit{res} and if the function fails for another reason 3169 it returns an error code. 3170 3171 \mysection{PKCS \#1 Digital Signatures} 3172 3173 \subsection{PSS Encoding} 3174 PSS encoding is the second half of the PKCS \#1 standard which is padding to be applied to messages that are signed. 3175 3176 \index{pkcs\_1\_pss\_encode()} 3177 \begin{alltt} 3178 int pkcs_1_pss_encode( 3179 const unsigned char *msghash, 3180 unsigned long msghashlen, 3181 unsigned long saltlen, 3182 prng_state *prng, 3183 int prng_idx, 3184 int hash_idx, 3185 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3186 unsigned char *out, 3187 unsigned long *outlen); 3188 \end{alltt} 3189 3190 This function assumes the message to be PSS encoded has previously been hashed. The input hash \textit{msghash} is of length 3191 \textit{msghashlen}. PSS allows a variable length random salt (it can be zero length) to be introduced in the signature process. 3192 \textit{hash\_idx} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash to use. \textit{prng\_idx} and \textit{prng} are the random 3193 number generator information required for the salt. 3194 3195 Similar to OAEP encoding \textit{modulus\_bitlen} is the size of the RSA modulus (in bits). It limits the size of the salt. If $m$ is the length 3196 of the modulus $h$ the length of the hash output (in octets) then there can be $m - h - 2$ bytes of salt. 3197 3198 This function does not actually sign the data it merely pads the hash of a message so that it can be processed by rsa\_exptmod(). 3199 3200 \subsection{PSS Decoding} 3201 3202 To decode a PSS encoded signature block you have to use the following. 3203 3204 \index{pkcs\_1\_pss\_decode()} 3205 \begin{alltt} 3206 int pkcs_1_pss_decode( 3207 const unsigned char *msghash, 3208 unsigned long msghashlen, 3209 const unsigned char *sig, 3210 unsigned long siglen, 3211 unsigned long saltlen, 3212 int hash_idx, 3213 unsigned long modulus_bitlen, 3214 int *res); 3215 \end{alltt} 3216 This will decode the PSS encoded message in \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} and compare it to values in \textit{msghash} of length 3217 \textit{msghashlen}. If the block is a valid PSS block and the decoded hash equals the hash supplied \textit{res} is set to non--zero. Otherwise, 3218 it is set to zero. The rest of the parameters are as in the PSS encode call. 3219 3220 It's important to use the same \textit{saltlen} and hash for both encoding and decoding as otherwise the procedure will not work. 3221 3222 \mysection{RSA Key Operations} 3223 \subsection{Background} 3224 3225 RSA is a public key algorithm that is based on the inability to find the \textit{e-th} root modulo a composite of unknown 3226 factorization. Normally the difficulty of breaking RSA is associated with the integer factoring problem but they are 3227 not strictly equivalent. 3228 3229 The system begins with with two primes $p$ and $q$ and their product $N = pq$. The order or \textit{Euler totient} of the 3230 multiplicative sub-group formed modulo $N$ is given as $\phi(N) = (p - 1)(q - 1)$ which can be reduced to 3231 $\mbox{lcm}(p - 1, q - 1)$. The public key consists of the composite $N$ and some integer $e$ such that 3232 $\mbox{gcd}(e, \phi(N)) = 1$. The private key consists of the composite $N$ and the inverse of $e$ modulo $\phi(N)$ 3233 often simply denoted as $de \equiv 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }\phi(N))$. 3234 3235 A person who wants to encrypt with your public key simply forms an integer (the plaintext) $M$ such that 3236 $1 < M < N-2$ and computes the ciphertext $C = M^e\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }N)$. Since finding the inverse exponent $d$ 3237 given only $N$ and $e$ appears to be intractable only the owner of the private key can decrypt the ciphertext and compute 3238 $C^d \equiv \left (M^e \right)^d \equiv M^1 \equiv M\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }N)$. Similarly the owner of the private key 3239 can sign a message by \textit{decrypting} it. Others can verify it by \textit{encrypting} it. 3240 3241 Currently RSA is a difficult system to cryptanalyze provided that both primes are large and not close to each other. 3242 Ideally $e$ should be larger than $100$ to prevent direct analysis. For example, if $e$ is three and you do not pad 3243 the plaintext to be encrypted than it is possible that $M^3 < N$ in which case finding the cube-root would be trivial. 3244 The most often suggested value for $e$ is $65537$ since it is large enough to make such attacks impossible and also well 3245 designed for fast exponentiation (requires 16 squarings and one multiplication). 3246 3247 It is important to pad the input to RSA since it has particular mathematical structure. For instance 3248 $M_1^dM_2^d = (M_1M_2)^d$ which can be used to forge a signature. Suppose $M_3 = M_1M_2$ is a message you want 3249 to have a forged signature for. Simply get the signatures for $M_1$ and $M_2$ on their own and multiply the result 3250 together. Similar tricks can be used to deduce plaintexts from ciphertexts. It is important not only to sign 3251 the hash of documents only but also to pad the inputs with data to remove such structure. 3252 3253 \subsection{RSA Key Generation} 3254 3255 For RSA routines a single \textit{rsa\_key} structure is used. To make a new RSA key call: 3256 \index{rsa\_make\_key()} 3257 \begin{verbatim} 3258 int rsa_make_key(prng_state *prng, 3259 int wprng, 3260 int size, 3261 long e, 3262 rsa_key *key); 3263 \end{verbatim} 3264 3265 Where \textit{wprng} is the index into the PRNG descriptor array. The \textit{size} parameter is the size in bytes of the RSA modulus desired. 3266 The \textit{e} parameter is the encryption exponent desired, typical values are 3, 17, 257 and 65537. Stick with 65537 since it is big enough to prevent 3267 trivial math attacks, and not super slow. The \textit{key} parameter is where the constructed key is placed. All keys must be at 3268 least 128 bytes, and no more than 512 bytes in size (\textit{that is from 1024 to 4096 bits}). 3269 3270 \index{rsa\_free()} 3271 Note: the \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} function allocates memory at run--time when you make the key. Make sure to call 3272 \textit{rsa\_free()} (see below) when you are finished with the key. If \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} fails it will automatically 3273 free the memory allocated. 3274 3275 \index{PK\_PRIVATE} \index{PK\_PUBLIC} 3276 There are two types of RSA keys. The types are {\bf PK\_PRIVATE} and {\bf PK\_PUBLIC}. The first type is a private 3277 RSA key which includes the CRT parameters\footnote{As of v0.99 the PK\_PRIVATE\_OPTIMIZED type has been deprecated, and has been replaced by the 3278 PK\_PRIVATE type.} in the form of a RSAPrivateKey (PKCS \#1 compliant). The second type, is a public RSA key which only includes the modulus and public exponent. 3279 It takes the form of a RSAPublicKey (PKCS \#1 compliant). 3280 3281 \subsection{RSA Exponentiation} 3282 To do raw work with the RSA function, that is without padding, use the following function: 3283 \index{rsa\_exptmod()} 3284 \begin{verbatim} 3285 int rsa_exptmod(const unsigned char *in, 3286 unsigned long inlen, 3287 unsigned char *out, 3288 unsigned long *outlen, 3289 int which, 3290 rsa_key *key); 3291 \end{verbatim} 3292 This will load the bignum from \textit{in} as a big endian integer in the format PKCS \#1 specifies, raises it to either \textit{e} or \textit{d} and stores the result 3293 in \textit{out} and the size of the result in \textit{outlen}. \textit{which} is set to {\bf PK\_PUBLIC} to use \textit{e} 3294 (i.e. for encryption/verifying) and set to {\bf PK\_PRIVATE} to use \textit{d} as the exponent (i.e. for decrypting/signing). 3295 3296 Note: the output of this function is zero--padded as per PKCS \#1 specification. This allows this routine to work with PKCS \#1 padding functions properly. 3297 3298 \mysection{RSA Key Encryption} 3299 Normally RSA is used to encrypt short symmetric keys which are then used in block ciphers to encrypt a message. 3300 To facilitate encrypting short keys the following functions have been provided. 3301 3302 \index{rsa\_encrypt\_key()} 3303 \begin{verbatim} 3304 int rsa_encrypt_key( 3305 const unsigned char *in, 3306 unsigned long inlen, 3307 unsigned char *out, 3308 unsigned long *outlen, 3309 const unsigned char *lparam, 3310 unsigned long lparamlen, 3311 prng_state *prng, 3312 int prng_idx, 3313 int hash_idx, 3314 rsa_key *key); 3315 \end{verbatim} 3316 This function will OAEP pad \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} bytes, RSA encrypt it, and store the ciphertext 3317 in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets. The \textit{lparam} and \textit{lparamlen} are the same parameters you would pass 3318 to \index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode()} pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode(). 3319 3320 \subsection{Extended Encryption} 3321 As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 PKCS \#1 style paddings in these higher level functions. The following is the extended 3322 encryption function: 3323 3324 \index{rsa\_encrypt\_key\_ex()} 3325 \begin{verbatim} 3326 int rsa_encrypt_key_ex( 3327 const unsigned char *in, 3328 unsigned long inlen, 3329 unsigned char *out, 3330 unsigned long *outlen, 3331 const unsigned char *lparam, 3332 unsigned long lparamlen, 3333 prng_state *prng, 3334 int prng_idx, 3335 int hash_idx, 3336 int padding, 3337 rsa_key *key); 3338 \end{verbatim} 3339 3340 \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} 3341 The parameters are all the same as for rsa\_encrypt\_key() except for the addition of the \textit{padding} parameter. It must be set to 3342 \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform v1.5 encryption, or set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} to perform v2.1 encryption. 3343 3344 When performing v1.5 encryption, the hash and lparam parameters are totally ignored and can be set to \textbf{NULL} or zero (respectively). 3345 3346 \mysection{RSA Key Decryption} 3347 \index{rsa\_decrypt\_key()} 3348 \begin{verbatim} 3349 int rsa_decrypt_key( 3350 const unsigned char *in, 3351 unsigned long inlen, 3352 unsigned char *out, 3353 unsigned long *outlen, 3354 const unsigned char *lparam, 3355 unsigned long lparamlen, 3356 int hash_idx, 3357 int *stat, 3358 rsa_key *key); 3359 \end{verbatim} 3360 This function will RSA decrypt \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} then OAEP de-pad the resulting data and store it in 3361 \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}. The \textit{lparam} and \textit{lparamlen} are the same parameters you would pass 3362 to pkcs\_1\_oaep\_decode(). 3363 3364 If the RSA decrypted data is not a valid OAEP packet then \textit{stat} is set to $0$. Otherwise, it is set to $1$. 3365 3366 \subsection{Extended Decryption} 3367 As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 PKCS \#1 style paddings in these higher level functions. The following is the extended 3368 decryption function: 3369 3370 \index{rsa\_decrypt\_key\_ex()} 3371 \begin{verbatim} 3372 int rsa_decrypt_key_ex( 3373 const unsigned char *in, 3374 unsigned long inlen, 3375 unsigned char *out, 3376 unsigned long *outlen, 3377 const unsigned char *lparam, 3378 unsigned long lparamlen, 3379 int hash_idx, 3380 int padding, 3381 int *stat, 3382 rsa_key *key); 3383 \end{verbatim} 3384 3385 Similar to the extended encryption, the new parameter \textit{padding} indicates which version of the PKCS \#1 standard to use. 3386 It must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform v1.5 decryption, or set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} to perform v2.1 decryption. 3387 3388 When performing v1.5 decryption, the hash and lparam parameters are totally ignored and can be set to \textbf{NULL} or zero (respectively). 3389 3390 3391 \mysection{RSA Signature Generation} 3392 Similar to RSA key encryption RSA is also used to \textit{digitally sign} message digests (hashes). To facilitate this 3393 process the following functions have been provided. 3394 3395 \index{rsa\_sign\_hash()} 3396 \begin{verbatim} 3397 int rsa_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in, 3398 unsigned long inlen, 3399 unsigned char *out, 3400 unsigned long *outlen, 3401 prng_state *prng, 3402 int prng_idx, 3403 int hash_idx, 3404 unsigned long saltlen, 3405 rsa_key *key); 3406 \end{verbatim} 3407 3408 This will PSS encode the message digest pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. Next, the PSS encoded hash will be RSA 3409 \textit{signed} and the output stored in the buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets. 3410 3411 The \textit{hash\_idx} parameter indicates which hash will be used to create the PSS encoding. It should be the same as the hash used to 3412 hash the message being signed. The \textit{saltlen} parameter indicates the length of the desired salt, and should typically be small. A good 3413 default value is between 8 and 16 octets. Strictly, it must be small than $modulus\_len - hLen - 2$ where \textit{modulus\_len} is the size of 3414 the RSA modulus (in octets), and \textit{hLen} is the length of the message digest produced by the chosen hash. 3415 3416 \subsection{Extended Signatures} 3417 3418 As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 signatures. The extended signature generation function has the following prototype: 3419 3420 \index{rsa\_sign\_hash\_ex()} 3421 \begin{verbatim} 3422 int rsa_sign_hash_ex( 3423 const unsigned char *in, 3424 unsigned long inlen, 3425 unsigned char *out, 3426 unsigned long *outlen, 3427 int padding, 3428 prng_state *prng, 3429 int prng_idx, 3430 int hash_idx, 3431 unsigned long saltlen, 3432 rsa_key *key); 3433 \end{verbatim} 3434 3435 This will PKCS encode the message digest pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. Next, the PKCS encoded hash will be RSA 3436 \textit{signed} and the output stored in the buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets. The \textit{padding} parameter 3437 must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to produce a v1.5 signature, otherwise, it must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_PSS} to produce a 3438 v2.1 signature. 3439 3440 When performing a v1.5 signature the \textit{prng}, \textit{prng\_idx}, and \textit{hash\_idx} parameters are not checked and can be left to any 3441 values such as $\lbrace$\textbf{NULL}, 0, 0$\rbrace$. 3442 3443 \mysection{RSA Signature Verification} 3444 \index{rsa\_verify\_hash()} 3445 \begin{verbatim} 3446 int rsa_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig, 3447 unsigned long siglen, 3448 const unsigned char *msghash, 3449 unsigned long msghashlen, 3450 int hash_idx, 3451 unsigned long saltlen, 3452 int *stat, 3453 rsa_key *key); 3454 \end{verbatim} 3455 3456 This will RSA \textit{verify} the signature pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets. Next, the RSA decoded data is PSS decoded 3457 and the extracted hash is compared against the message digest pointed to by \textit{msghash} of length \textit{msghashlen} octets. 3458 3459 If the RSA decoded data is not a valid PSS message, or if the PSS decoded hash does not match the \textit{msghash} 3460 value, \textit{res} is set to $0$. Otherwise, if the function succeeds, and signature is valid \textit{res} is set to $1$. 3461 3462 \subsection{Extended Verification} 3463 3464 As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 signature verification. The extended signature verification function has the following prototype: 3465 3466 \index{rsa\_verify\_hash\_ex()} 3467 \begin{verbatim} 3468 int rsa_verify_hash_ex( 3469 const unsigned char *sig, 3470 unsigned long siglen, 3471 const unsigned char *hash, 3472 unsigned long hashlen, 3473 int padding, 3474 int hash_idx, 3475 unsigned long saltlen, 3476 int *stat, 3477 rsa_key *key); 3478 \end{verbatim} 3479 3480 This will RSA \textit{verify} the signature pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets. Next, the RSA decoded data is PKCS decoded 3481 and the extracted hash is compared against the message digest pointed to by \textit{msghash} of length \textit{msghashlen} octets. 3482 3483 If the RSA decoded data is not a valid PSS message, or if the PKCS decoded hash does not match the \textit{msghash} 3484 value, \textit{res} is set to $0$. Otherwise, if the function succeeds, and signature is valid \textit{res} is set to $1$. 3485 3486 The \textit{padding} parameter must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform a v1.5 verification. Otherwise, it must be set to 3487 \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_PSS} to perform a v2.1 verification. When performing a v1.5 verification the \textit{hash\_idx} parameter is ignored. 3488 3489 \mysection{RSA Encryption Example} 3490 \begin{small} 3491 \begin{verbatim} 3492 #include <tomcrypt.h> 3493 int main(void) 3494 { 3495 int err, hash_idx, prng_idx, res; 3496 unsigned long l1, l2; 3497 unsigned char pt[16], pt2[16], out[1024]; 3498 rsa_key key; 3499 3500 /* register prng/hash */ 3501 if (register_prng(&sprng_desc) == -1) { 3502 printf("Error registering sprng"); 3503 return EXIT_FAILURE; 3504 } 3505 3506 /* register a math library (in this case TomsFastMath) 3507 ltc_mp = tfm_desc; 3508 3509 if (register_hash(&sha1_desc) == -1) { 3510 printf("Error registering sha1"); 3511 return EXIT_FAILURE; 3512 } 3513 hash_idx = find_hash("sha1"); 3514 prng_idx = find_prng("sprng"); 3515 3516 /* make an RSA-1024 key */ 3517 if ((err = rsa_make_key(NULL, /* PRNG state */ 3518 prng_idx, /* PRNG idx */ 3519 1024/8, /* 1024-bit key */ 3520 65537, /* we like e=65537 */ 3521 &key) /* where to store the key */ 3522 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 3523 printf("rsa_make_key %s", error_to_string(err)); 3524 return EXIT_FAILURE; 3525 } 3526 3527 /* fill in pt[] with a key we want to send ... */ 3528 l1 = sizeof(out); 3529 if ((err = rsa_encrypt_key(pt, /* data we wish to encrypt */ 3530 16, /* data is 16 bytes long */ 3531 out, /* where to store ciphertext */ 3532 &l1, /* length of ciphertext */ 3533 "TestApp", /* our lparam for this program */ 3534 7, /* lparam is 7 bytes long */ 3535 NULL, /* PRNG state */ 3536 prng_idx, /* prng idx */ 3537 hash_idx, /* hash idx */ 3538 &key) /* our RSA key */ 3539 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 3540 printf("rsa_encrypt_key %s", error_to_string(err)); 3541 return EXIT_FAILURE; 3542 } 3543 3544 /* now let's decrypt the encrypted key */ 3545 l2 = sizeof(pt2); 3546 if ((err = rsa_decrypt_key(out, /* encrypted data */ 3547 l1, /* length of ciphertext */ 3548 pt2, /* where to put plaintext */ 3549 &l2, /* plaintext length */ 3550 "TestApp", /* lparam for this program */ 3551 7, /* lparam is 7 bytes long */ 3552 hash_idx, /* hash idx */ 3553 &res, /* validity of data */ 3554 &key) /* our RSA key */ 3555 ) != CRYPT_OK) { 3556 printf("rsa_decrypt_key %s", error_to_string(err)); 3557 return EXIT_FAILURE; 3558 } 3559 /* if all went well pt == pt2, l2 == 16, res == 1 */ 3560 } 3561 \end{verbatim} 3562 \end{small} 3563 3564 \mysection{RSA Key Format} 3565 3566 The RSA key format adopted for exporting and importing keys is the PKCS \#1 format defined by the ASN.1 constructs known as 3567 RSAPublicKey and RSAPrivateKey. Additionally, the OpenSSL key format is supported by the import function only. 3568 3569 \subsection{RSA Key Export} 3570 To export a RSA key use the following function. 3571 3572 \index{rsa\_export()} 3573 \begin{verbatim} 3574 int rsa_export(unsigned char *out, 3575 unsigned long *outlen, 3576 int type, 3577 rsa_key *key); 3578 \end{verbatim} 3579 This will export the RSA key in either a RSAPublicKey or RSAPrivateKey (PKCS \#1 types) depending on the value of \textit{type}. When it is 3580 set to \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE} the export format will be RSAPrivateKey and otherwise it will be RSAPublicKey. 3581 3582 \subsection{RSA Key Import} 3583 To import a RSA key use the following function. 3584 3585 \index{rsa\_import()} 3586 \begin{verbatim} 3587 int rsa_import(const unsigned char *in, 3588 unsigned long inlen, 3589 rsa_key *key); 3590 \end{verbatim} 3591 3592 This will import the key stored in \textit{inlen} and import it to \textit{key}. If the function fails it will automatically free any allocated memory. This 3593 function can import both RSAPublicKey and RSAPrivateKey formats. 3594 3595 As of v1.06 this function can also import OpenSSL DER formatted public RSA keys. They are essentially encapsulated RSAPublicKeys. LibTomCrypt will 3596 import the key, strip off the additional data (it's the preferred hash) and fill in the rsa\_key structure as if it were a native RSAPublicKey. Note that 3597 there is no function provided to export in this format. 3598 3599 \chapter{Elliptic Curve Cryptography} 3600 3601 \mysection{Background} 3602 The library provides a set of core ECC functions as well that are designed to be the Elliptic Curve analogy of all of the 3603 Diffie-Hellman routines in the previous chapter. Elliptic curves (of certain forms) have the benefit that they are harder 3604 to attack (no sub-exponential attacks exist unlike normal DH crypto) in fact the fastest attack requires the square root 3605 of the order of the base point in time. That means if you use a base point of order $2^{192}$ (which would represent a 3606 192-bit key) then the work factor is $2^{96}$ in order to find the secret key. 3607 3608 The curves in this library are taken from the following website: 3609 \begin{verbatim} 3610 http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/dss.htm 3611 \end{verbatim} 3612 3613 As of v1.15 three new curves from the SECG standards are also included they are the secp112r1, secp128r1, and secp160r1 curves. These curves were added to 3614 support smaller devices which do not need as large keys for security. 3615 3616 They are all curves over the integers modulo a prime. The curves have the basic equation that is: 3617 \begin{equation} 3618 y^2 = x^3 - 3x + b\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p) 3619 \end{equation} 3620 3621 The variable $b$ is chosen such that the number of points is nearly maximal. In fact the order of the base points $\beta$ 3622 provided are very close to $p$ that is $\vert \vert \phi(\beta) \vert \vert \approx \vert \vert p \vert \vert$. The curves 3623 range in order from $\approx 2^{112}$ points to $\approx 2^{521}$. According to the source document any key size greater 3624 than or equal to 256-bits is sufficient for long term security. 3625 3626 \mysection{Fixed Point Optimizations} 3627 \index{Fixed Point ECC} 3628 \index{MECC\_FP} 3629 As of v1.12 of LibTomCrypt, support for Fixed Point ECC point multiplication has been added. It is a generic optimization that is 3630 supported by any conforming math plugin. It is enabled by defining \textbf{MECC\_FP} during the build, such as 3631 3632 \begin{verbatim} 3633 CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DMECC_FP" make 3634 \end{verbatim} 3635 3636 which will build LTC using the TFM math library and enabling this new feature. The feature is not enabled by default as it is \textbf{NOT} thread 3637 safe (by default). It supports the LTC locking macros (such as by enabling LTC\_PTHREAD), but by default is not locked. 3638 3639 \index{FP\_ENTRIES} 3640 The optimization works by using a Fixed Point multiplier on any base point you use twice or more in a short period of time. It has a limited size 3641 cache (of FP\_ENTRIES entries) which it uses to hold recent bases passed to ltc\_ecc\_mulmod(). Any base detected to be used twice is sent through the 3642 pre--computation phase, and then the fixed point algorithm can be used. For example, if you use a NIST base point twice in a row, the 2$^{nd}$ and 3643 all subsequent point multiplications with that point will use the faster algorithm. 3644 3645 \index{FP\_LUT} 3646 The optimization uses a window on the multiplicand of FP\_LUT bits (default: 8, min: 2, max: 12), and this controls the memory/time trade-off. The larger the 3647 value the faster the algorithm will be but the more memory it will take. The memory usage is $3 \cdot 2^{FP\_LUT}$ integers which by default 3648 with TFM amounts to about 400kB of memory. Tuning TFM (by changing FP\_SIZE) can decrease the usage by a fair amount. Memory is only used by a cache entry 3649 if it is active. Both FP\_ENTRIES and FP\_LUT are definable on the command line if you wish to override them. For instance, 3650 3651 \begin{verbatim} 3652 CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DMECC_FP -DFP_ENTRIES=8 -DFP_LUT=6" make 3653 \end{verbatim} 3654 3655 \begin{flushleft} 3656 \index{FP\_SIZE} \index{TFM} \index{tfm.h} 3657 would define a window of 6 bits and limit the cache to 8 entries. Generally, it is better to first tune TFM by adjusting FP\_SIZE (from tfm.h). It defaults 3658 to 4096 bits (512 bytes) which is way more than what is required by ECC. At most, you need 1152 bits to accommodate ECC--521. If you're only using (say) 3659 ECC--256 you will only need 576 bits, which would reduce the memory usage by 700\%. 3660 \end{flushleft} 3661 3662 \mysection{Key Format} 3663 LibTomCrypt uses a unique format for ECC public and private keys. While ANSI X9.63 partially specifies key formats, it does it in a less than ideally simple manner. \ 3664 In the case of LibTomCrypt, it is meant \textbf{solely} for NIST and SECG $GF(p)$ curves. The format of the keys is as follows: 3665 3666 \index{ECC Key Format} 3667 \begin{small} 3668 \begin{verbatim} 3669 ECCPublicKey ::= SEQUENCE { 3670 flags BIT STRING(0), -- public/private flag (always zero), 3671 keySize INTEGER, -- Curve size (in bits) divided by eight 3672 -- and rounded down, e.g. 521 => 65 3673 pubkey.x INTEGER, -- The X co-ordinate of the public key point 3674 pubkey.y INTEGER, -- The Y co-ordinate of the public key point 3675 } 3676 3677 ECCPrivateKey ::= SEQUENCE { 3678 flags BIT STRING(1), -- public/private flag (always one), 3679 keySize INTEGER, -- Curve size (in bits) divided by eight 3680 -- and rounded down, e.g. 521 => 65 3681 pubkey.x INTEGER, -- The X co-ordinate of the public key point 3682 pubkey.y INTEGER, -- The Y co-ordinate of the public key point 3683 secret.k INTEGER, -- The secret key scalar 3684 } 3685 \end{verbatim} 3686 \end{small} 3687 3688 The first flags bit denotes whether the key is public (zero) or private (one). 3689 3690 \vfil 3691 3692 \mysection{ECC Curve Parameters} 3693 The library uses the following structure to describe an elliptic curve. This is used internally, as well as by the new 3694 extended ECC functions which allow the user to specify their own curves. 3695 3696 \index{ltc\_ecc\_set\_type} 3697 \begin{verbatim} 3698 /** Structure defines a NIST GF(p) curve */ 3699 typedef struct { 3700 /** The size of the curve in octets */ 3701 int size; 3702 3703 /** name of curve */ 3704 char *name; 3705 3706 /** The prime that defines the field (encoded in hex) */ 3707 char *prime; 3708 3709 /** The fields B param (hex) */ 3710 char *B; 3711 3712 /** The order of the curve (hex) */ 3713 char *order; 3714 3715 /** The x co-ordinate of the base point on the curve (hex) */ 3716 char *Gx; 3717 3718 /** The y co-ordinate of the base point on the curve (hex) */ 3719 char *Gy; 3720 } ltc_ecc_set_type; 3721 \end{verbatim} 3722 3723 The curve must be of the form $y^2 = x^3 - 3x + b$, and all of the integer parameters are encoded in hexadecimal format. 3724 3725 \mysection{Core Functions} 3726 \subsection{ECC Key Generation} 3727 There is a key structure called \textit{ecc\_key} used by the ECC functions. There is a function to make a key: 3728 \index{ecc\_make\_key()} 3729 \begin{verbatim} 3730 int ecc_make_key(prng_state *prng, 3731 int wprng, 3732 int keysize, 3733 ecc_key *key); 3734 \end{verbatim} 3735 3736 The \textit{keysize} is the size of the modulus in bytes desired. Currently directly supported values are 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 48, and 65 bytes which 3737 correspond to key sizes of 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 384, and 521 bits respectively. If you pass a key size that is between any key size it will round 3738 the keysize up to the next available one. 3739 3740 The function will free any internally allocated resources if there is an error. 3741 3742 \subsection{Extended Key Generation} 3743 As of v1.16, the library supports an extended key generation routine which allows the user to specify their own curve. It is specified as follows: 3744 3745 \index{ecc\_make\_key\_ex()} 3746 \begin{verbatim} 3747 int ecc_make_key_ex( 3748 prng_state *prng, 3749 int wprng, 3750 ecc_key *key, 3751 const ltc_ecc_set_type *dp); 3752 \end{verbatim} 3753 3754 This function generates a random ECC key over the curve specified by the parameters by \textit{dp}. The rest of the parameters are equivalent to 3755 those from the original key generation function. 3756 3757 \subsection{ECC Key Free} 3758 To free the memory allocated by a ecc\_make\_key(), ecc\_make\_key\_ex(), ecc\_import(), or ecc\_import\_ex() call use the following function: 3759 \index{ecc\_free()} 3760 \begin{verbatim} 3761 void ecc_free(ecc_key *key); 3762 \end{verbatim} 3763 3764 \subsection{ECC Key Export} 3765 To export an ECC key using the LibTomCrypt format call the following function: 3766 \index{ecc\_export()} 3767 \begin{verbatim} 3768 int ecc_export(unsigned char *out, 3769 unsigned long *outlen, 3770 int type, 3771 ecc_key *key); 3772 \end{verbatim} 3773 This will export the key with the given \textit{type} (\textbf{PK\_PUBLIC} or \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE}), and store it to \textit{out}. 3774 3775 \subsection{ECC Key Import} 3776 The following function imports a LibTomCrypt format ECC key: 3777 \index{ecc\_import()} 3778 \begin{verbatim} 3779 int ecc_import(const unsigned char *in, 3780 unsigned long inlen, 3781 ecc_key *key); 3782 \end{verbatim} 3783 This will import the ECC key from \textit{in}, and store it in the ecc\_key structure pointed to by \textit{key}. If the operation fails it will free 3784 any allocated memory automatically. 3785 3786 \subsection{Extended Key Import} 3787 3788 The following function imports a LibTomCrypt format ECC key using a specified set of curve parameters: 3789 \index{ecc\_import\_ex()} 3790 \begin{verbatim} 3791 int ecc_import_ex(const unsigned char *in, 3792 unsigned long inlen, 3793 ecc_key *key, 3794 const ltc_ecc_set_type *dp); 3795 \end{verbatim} 3796 This will import the key from the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. The key is stored in 3797 the ECC structure pointed to by \textit{key}. The curve is specified by the parameters pointed to by \textit{dp}. The function will free 3798 all internally allocated memory upon error. 3799 3800 \subsection{ANSI X9.63 Export} 3801 The following function exports an ECC public key in the ANSI X9.63 format: 3802 3803 \index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_export()} 3804 \begin{verbatim} 3805 int ecc_ansi_x963_export( ecc_key *key, 3806 unsigned char *out, 3807 unsigned long *outlen); 3808 \end{verbatim} 3809 The ECC key pointed to by \textit{key} is exported in public fashion to the array pointed to by \textit{out}. The ANSI X9.63 format used is from 3810 section 4.3.6 of the standard. It does not allow for the export of private keys. 3811 3812 \subsection{ANSI X9.63 Import} 3813 The following function imports an ANSI X9.63 section 4.3.6 format public ECC key: 3814 3815 \index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_import()} 3816 \begin{verbatim} 3817 int ecc_ansi_x963_import(const unsigned char *in, 3818 unsigned long inlen, 3819 ecc_key *key); 3820 \end{verbatim} 3821 This will import the key stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. The imported key is stored in the ECC key pointed to by 3822 \textit{key}. The function will free any allocated memory upon error. 3823 3824 \subsection{Extended ANSI X9.63 Import} 3825 The following function allows the importing of an ANSI x9.63 section 4.3.6 format public ECC key using user specified domain parameters: 3826 3827 \index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_import\_ex()} 3828 \begin{verbatim} 3829 int ecc_ansi_x963_import_ex(const unsigned char *in, 3830 unsigned long inlen, 3831 ecc_key *key, 3832 ltc_ecc_set_type *dp); 3833 \end{verbatim} 3834 This will import the key stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets using the domain parameters pointed to by \textit{dp}. 3835 The imported key is stored in the ECC key pointed to by \textit{key}. The function will free any allocated memory upon error. 3836 3837 \subsection{ECC Shared Secret} 3838 To construct a Diffie-Hellman shared secret with a private and public ECC key, use the following function: 3839 \index{ecc\_shared\_secret()} 3840 \begin{verbatim} 3841 int ecc_shared_secret( ecc_key *private_key, 3842 ecc_key *public_key, 3843 unsigned char *out, 3844 unsigned long *outlen); 3845 \end{verbatim} 3846 The \textit{private\_key} is typically the local private key, and \textit{public\_key} is the key the remote party has shared. 3847 Note: this function stores only the $x$ co-ordinate of the shared elliptic point as described in ANSI X9.63 ECC--DH. 3848 3849 \mysection{ECC Diffie-Hellman Encryption} 3850 ECC--DH Encryption is performed by producing a random key, hashing it, and XOR'ing the digest against the plaintext. It is not strictly ANSI X9.63 compliant 3851 but it is very similar. It has been extended by using an ASN.1 sequence and hash object identifiers to allow portable usage. The following function 3852 encrypts a short string (no longer than the message digest) using this technique: 3853 3854 \subsection{ECC-DH Encryption} 3855 \index{ecc\_encrypt\_key()} 3856 \begin{verbatim} 3857 int ecc_encrypt_key(const unsigned char *in, 3858 unsigned long inlen, 3859 unsigned char *out, 3860 unsigned long *outlen, 3861 prng_state *prng, 3862 int wprng, 3863 int hash, 3864 ecc_key *key); 3865 \end{verbatim} 3866 3867 As the name implies this function encrypts a (symmetric) key, and is not intended for encrypting long messages directly. It will encrypt the 3868 plaintext in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. It uses the public ECC key pointed to by \textit{key}, and 3869 hash algorithm indexed by \textit{hash} to construct a shared secret which may be XOR'ed against the plaintext. The ciphertext is stored in 3870 the output buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets. 3871 3872 The data is encrypted to the public ECC \textit{key} such that only the holder of the private key can decrypt the payload. To have multiple 3873 recipients multiple call to this function for each public ECC key is required. 3874 3875 \subsection{ECC-DH Decryption} 3876 \index{ecc\_decrypt\_key()} 3877 \begin{verbatim} 3878 int ecc_decrypt_key(const unsigned char *in, 3879 unsigned long inlen, 3880 unsigned char *out, 3881 unsigned long *outlen, 3882 ecc_key *key); 3883 \end{verbatim} 3884 3885 This function will decrypt an encrypted payload. The \textit{key} provided must be the private key corresponding to the public key 3886 used during encryption. If the wrong key is provided the function will not specifically return an error code. It is important 3887 to use some form of challenge response in that case (e.g. compute a MAC of a known string). 3888 3889 \subsection{ECC Encryption Format} 3890 The packet format for the encrypted keys is the following ASN.1 SEQUENCE: 3891 3892 \begin{verbatim} 3893 ECCEncrypt ::= SEQUENCE { 3894 hashID OBJECT IDENTIFIER, -- OID of hash used 3895 pubkey OCTET STRING , -- Encapsulated ECCPublicKey 3896 skey OCTET STRING -- xor of plaintext and 3897 --"hash of shared secret" 3898 } 3899 \end{verbatim} 3900 3901 \mysection{EC DSA Signatures} 3902 3903 There are also functions to sign and verify messages. They use the ANSI X9.62 EC-DSA algorithm to generate and verify signatures in the 3904 ANSI X9.62 format. 3905 3906 \subsection{EC-DSA Signature Generation} 3907 To sign a message digest (hash) use the following function: 3908 3909 \index{ecc\_sign\_hash()} 3910 \begin{verbatim} 3911 int ecc_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in, 3912 unsigned long inlen, 3913 unsigned char *out, 3914 unsigned long *outlen, 3915 prng_state *prng, 3916 int wprng, 3917 ecc_key *key); 3918 \end{verbatim} 3919 3920 This function will EC--DSA sign the message digest stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. The signature 3921 will be stored in the array pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets. The function requires a properly seeded PRNG, and 3922 the ECC \textit{key} provided must be a private key. 3923 3924 \subsection{EC-DSA Signature Verification} 3925 \index{ecc\_verify\_hash()} 3926 \begin{verbatim} 3927 int ecc_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig, 3928 unsigned long siglen, 3929 const unsigned char *hash, 3930 unsigned long hashlen, 3931 int *stat, 3932 ecc_key *key); 3933 \end{verbatim} 3934 3935 This function will verify the EC-DSA signature in the array pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets, against the message digest 3936 pointed to by the array \textit{hash} of length \textit{hashlen}. It will store a non--zero value in \textit{stat} if the signature is valid. Note: 3937 the function will not return an error if the signature is invalid. It will return an error, if the actual signature payload is an invalid format. 3938 The ECC \textit{key} must be the public (or private) ECC key corresponding to the key that performed the signature. 3939 3940 \subsection{Signature Format} 3941 The signature code is an implementation of X9.62 EC--DSA, and the output is compliant for GF(p) curves. 3942 3943 \mysection{ECC Keysizes} 3944 With ECC if you try to sign a hash that is bigger than your ECC key you can run into problems. The math will still work, and in effect the signature will still 3945 work. With ECC keys the strength of the signature is limited by the size of the hash, or the size of they key, whichever is smaller. For example, if you sign with 3946 SHA256 and an ECC-192 key, you in effect have 96--bits of security. 3947 3948 The library will not warn you if you make this mistake, so it is important to check yourself before using the signatures. 3949 3950 \chapter{Digital Signature Algorithm} 3951 \mysection{Introduction} 3952 The Digital Signature Algorithm (or DSA) is a variant of the ElGamal Signature scheme which has been modified to 3953 reduce the bandwidth of the signatures. For example, to have \textit{80-bits of security} with ElGamal, you need a group with an order of at least 1024--bits. 3954 With DSA, you need a group of order at least 160--bits. By comparison, the ElGamal signature would require at least 256 bytes of storage, whereas the DSA signature 3955 would require only at least 40 bytes. 3956 3957 \mysection{Key Format} 3958 Since no useful public standard for DSA key storage was presented to me during the course of this development I made my own ASN.1 SEQUENCE which I document 3959 now so that others can interoperate with this library. 3960 3961 \begin{verbatim} 3962 DSAPublicKey ::= SEQUENCE { 3963 publicFlags BIT STRING(0), -- must be 0 3964 g INTEGER , -- base generator 3965 -- check that g^q mod p == 1 3966 -- and that 1 < g < p - 1 3967 p INTEGER , -- prime modulus 3968 q INTEGER , -- order of sub-group 3969 -- (must be prime) 3970 y INTEGER , -- public key, specifically, 3971 -- g^x mod p, 3972 -- check that y^q mod p == 1 3973 -- and that 1 < y < p - 1 3974 } 3975 3976 DSAPrivateKey ::= SEQUENCE { 3977 publicFlags BIT STRING(1), -- must be 1 3978 g INTEGER , -- base generator 3979 -- check that g^q mod p == 1 3980 -- and that 1 < g < p - 1 3981 p INTEGER , -- prime modulus 3982 q INTEGER , -- order of sub-group 3983 -- (must be prime) 3984 y INTEGER , -- public key, specifically, 3985 -- g^x mod p, 3986 -- check that y^q mod p == 1 3987 -- and that 1 < y < p - 1 3988 x INTEGER -- private key 3989 } 3990 \end{verbatim} 3991 3992 The leading BIT STRING has a single bit in it which is zero for public keys and one for private keys. This makes the structure uniquely decodable, 3993 and easy to work with. 3994 3995 \mysection{Key Generation} 3996 To make a DSA key you must call the following function 3997 \begin{verbatim} 3998 int dsa_make_key(prng_state *prng, 3999 int wprng, 4000 int group_size, 4001 int modulus_size, 4002 dsa_key *key); 4003 \end{verbatim} 4004 The variable \textit{prng} is an active PRNG state and \textit{wprng} the index to the descriptor. \textit{group\_size} and 4005 \textit{modulus\_size} control the difficulty of forging a signature. Both parameters are in bytes. The larger the 4006 \textit{group\_size} the more difficult a forgery becomes upto a limit. The value of $group\_size$ is limited by 4007 $15 < group\_size < 1024$ and $modulus\_size - group\_size < 512$. Suggested values for the pairs are as follows. 4008 4009 \begin{figure}[here] 4010 \begin{center} 4011 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} 4012 \hline \textbf{Bits of Security} & \textbf{group\_size} & \textbf{modulus\_size} \\ 4013 \hline 80 & 20 & 128 \\ 4014 \hline 120 & 30 & 256 \\ 4015 \hline 140 & 35 & 384 \\ 4016 \hline 160 & 40 & 512 \\ 4017 \hline 4018 \end{tabular} 4019 \end{center} 4020 \caption{DSA Key Sizes} 4021 \end{figure} 4022 4023 When you are finished with a DSA key you can call the following function to free the memory used. 4024 \index{dsa\_free()} 4025 \begin{verbatim} 4026 void dsa_free(dsa_key *key); 4027 \end{verbatim} 4028 4029 \mysection{Key Verification} 4030 Each DSA key is composed of the following variables. 4031 4032 \begin{enumerate} 4033 \item $q$ a small prime of magnitude $256^{group\_size}$. 4034 \item $p = qr + 1$ a large prime of magnitude $256^{modulus\_size}$ where $r$ is a random even integer. 4035 \item $g = h^r \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ a generator of order $q$ modulo $p$. $h$ can be any non-trivial random 4036 value. For this library they start at $h = 2$ and step until $g$ is not $1$. 4037 \item $x$ a random secret (the secret key) in the range $1 < x < q$ 4038 \item $y = g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ the public key. 4039 \end{enumerate} 4040 4041 A DSA key is considered valid if it passes all of the following tests. 4042 4043 \begin{enumerate} 4044 \item $q$ must be prime. 4045 \item $p$ must be prime. 4046 \item $g$ cannot be one of $\lbrace -1, 0, 1 \rbrace$ (modulo $p$). 4047 \item $g$ must be less than $p$. 4048 \item $(p-1) \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }q\mbox{)}$. 4049 \item $g^q \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$. 4050 \item $1 < y < p - 1$ 4051 \item $y^q \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$. 4052 \end{enumerate} 4053 4054 Tests one and two ensure that the values will at least form a field which is required for the signatures to 4055 function. Tests three and four ensure that the generator $g$ is not set to a trivial value which would make signature 4056 forgery easier. Test five ensures that $q$ divides the order of multiplicative sub-group of $\Z/p\Z$. Test six 4057 ensures that the generator actually generates a prime order group. Tests seven and eight ensure that the public key 4058 is within range and belongs to a group of prime order. Note that test eight does not prove that $g$ generated $y$ only 4059 that $y$ belongs to a multiplicative sub-group of order $q$. 4060 4061 The following function will perform these tests. 4062 4063 \index{dsa\_verify\_key()} 4064 \begin{verbatim} 4065 int dsa_verify_key(dsa_key *key, int *stat); 4066 \end{verbatim} 4067 4068 This will test \textit{key} and store the result in \textit{stat}. If the result is $stat = 0$ the DSA key failed one of the tests 4069 and should not be used at all. If the result is $stat = 1$ the DSA key is valid (as far as valid mathematics are concerned). 4070 4071 \mysection{Signatures} 4072 \subsection{Signature Generation} 4073 To generate a DSA signature call the following function: 4074 4075 \index{dsa\_sign\_hash()} 4076 \begin{verbatim} 4077 int dsa_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in, 4078 unsigned long inlen, 4079 unsigned char *out, 4080 unsigned long *outlen, 4081 prng_state *prng, 4082 int wprng, 4083 dsa_key *key); 4084 \end{verbatim} 4085 4086 Which will sign the data in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} bytes. The signature is stored in \textit{out} and the size 4087 of the signature in \textit{outlen}. If the signature is longer than the size you initially specify in \textit{outlen} nothing 4088 is stored and the function returns an error code. The DSA \textit{key} must be of the \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE} persuasion. 4089 4090 \subsection{Signature Verification} 4091 To verify a hash created with that function use the following function: 4092 4093 \index{dsa\_verify\_hash()} 4094 \begin{verbatim} 4095 int dsa_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig, 4096 unsigned long siglen, 4097 const unsigned char *hash, 4098 unsigned long inlen, 4099 int *stat, 4100 dsa_key *key); 4101 \end{verbatim} 4102 Which will verify the data in \textit{hash} of length \textit{inlen} against the signature stored in \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen}. 4103 It will set \textit{stat} to $1$ if the signature is valid, otherwise it sets \textit{stat} to $0$. 4104 4105 \mysection{DSA Encrypt and Decrypt} 4106 As of version 1.07, the DSA keys can be used to encrypt and decrypt small payloads. It works similar to the ECC encryption where 4107 a shared key is computed, and the hash of the shared key XOR'ed against the plaintext forms the ciphertext. The format used is functional port of 4108 the ECC encryption format to the DSA algorithm. 4109 4110 \subsection{DSA Encryption} 4111 This function will encrypt a small payload with a recipients public DSA key. 4112 4113 \index{dsa\_encrypt\_key()} 4114 \begin{verbatim} 4115 int dsa_encrypt_key(const unsigned char *in, 4116 unsigned long inlen, 4117 unsigned char *out, 4118 unsigned long *outlen, 4119 prng_state *prng, 4120 int wprng, 4121 int hash, 4122 dsa_key *key); 4123 \end{verbatim} 4124 4125 This will encrypt the payload in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} and store the ciphertext in the output buffer \textit{out}. The 4126 length of the ciphertext \textit{outlen} must be originally set to the length of the output buffer. The DSA \textit{key} can be 4127 a public key. 4128 4129 \subsection{DSA Decryption} 4130 4131 \index{dsa\_decrypt\_key()} 4132 \begin{verbatim} 4133 int dsa_decrypt_key(const unsigned char *in, 4134 unsigned long inlen, 4135 unsigned char *out, 4136 unsigned long *outlen, 4137 dsa_key *key); 4138 \end{verbatim} 4139 This will decrypt the ciphertext \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}, and store the original payload in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}. 4140 The DSA \textit{key} must be a private key. 4141 4142 \mysection{DSA Key Import and Export} 4143 4144 \subsection{DSA Key Export} 4145 To export a DSA key so that it can be transported use the following function: 4146 \index{dsa\_export()} 4147 \begin{verbatim} 4148 int dsa_export(unsigned char *out, 4149 unsigned long *outlen, 4150 int type, 4151 dsa_key *key); 4152 \end{verbatim} 4153 This will export the DSA \textit{key} to the buffer \textit{out} and set the length in \textit{outlen} (which must have been previously 4154 initialized to the maximum buffer size). The \textit{type} variable may be either \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE} or \textbf{PK\_PUBLIC} 4155 depending on whether you want to export a private or public copy of the DSA key. 4156 4157 \subsection{DSA Key Import} 4158 To import an exported DSA key use the following function 4159 : 4160 \index{dsa\_import()} 4161 \begin{verbatim} 4162 int dsa_import(const unsigned char *in, 4163 unsigned long inlen, 4164 dsa_key *key); 4165 \end{verbatim} 4166 4167 This will import the DSA key from the buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the \textit{key}. If the process fails the function 4168 will automatically free all of the heap allocated in the process (you don't have to call dsa\_free()). 4169 4170 \chapter{Standards Support} 4171 \mysection{ASN.1 Formats} 4172 LibTomCrypt supports a variety of ASN.1 data types encoded with the Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER) suitable for various cryptographic protocols. The data types 4173 are all provided with three basic functions with \textit{similar} prototypes. One function has been dedicated to calculate the length in octets of a given 4174 format, and two functions have been dedicated to encoding and decoding the format. 4175 4176 On top of the basic data types are the SEQUENCE and SET data types which are collections of other ASN.1 types. They are provided 4177 in the same manner as the other data types except they use list of objects known as the \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} structure. It is defined as the following: 4178 4179 \index{ltc\_asn1\_list structure} 4180 \begin{verbatim} 4181 typedef struct { 4182 int type; 4183 void *data; 4184 unsigned long size; 4185 int used; 4186 struct ltc_asn1_list_ *prev, *next, 4187 *child, *parent; 4188 } ltc_asn1_list; 4189 \end{verbatim} 4190 4191 \index{LTC\_SET\_ASN1 macro} 4192 The \textit{type} field is one of the following ASN.1 field definitions. The \textit{data} pointer is a void pointer to the data to be encoded (or the destination) and the 4193 \textit{size} field is specific to what you are encoding (e.g. number of bits in the BIT STRING data type). The \textit{used} field is primarily for the CHOICE decoder 4194 and reflects if the particular member of a list was the decoded data type. To help build the lists in an orderly fashion the macro 4195 \textit{LTC\_SET\_ASN1(list, index, Type, Data, Size)} has been provided. 4196 4197 It will assign to the \textit{index}th position in the \textit{list} the triplet (Type, Data, Size). An example usage would be: 4198 4199 \begin{small} 4200 \begin{verbatim} 4201 ... 4202 ltc_asn1_list sequence[3]; 4203 unsigned long three=3; 4204 4205 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 0, LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, "hello", 5); 4206 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 1, LTC_ASN1_SHORT_INTEGER, &three, 1); 4207 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 2, LTC_ASN1_NULL, NULL, 0); 4208 \end{verbatim} 4209 \end{small} 4210 4211 The macro is relatively safe with respect to modifying variables, for instance the following code is equivalent. 4212 4213 \begin{small} 4214 \begin{verbatim} 4215 ... 4216 ltc_asn1_list sequence[3]; 4217 unsigned long three=3; 4218 int x=0; 4219 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, "hello", 5); 4220 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_SHORT_INTEGER, &three, 1); 4221 LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_NULL, NULL, 0); 4222 \end{verbatim} 4223 \end{small} 4224 4225 \begin{figure}[here] 4226 \begin{center} 4227 \begin{small} 4228 \begin{tabular}{|l|l|} 4229 \hline \textbf{Definition} & \textbf{ASN.1 Type} \\ 4230 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_EOL & End of a ASN.1 list structure. \\ 4231 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_BOOLEAN & BOOLEAN type \\ 4232 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_INTEGER & INTEGER (uses mp\_int) \\ 4233 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_SHORT\_INTEGER & INTEGER (32--bit using unsigned long) \\ 4234 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_BIT\_STRING & BIT STRING (one bit per char) \\ 4235 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_OCTET\_STRING & OCTET STRING (one octet per char) \\ 4236 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_NULL & NULL \\ 4237 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_OBJECT\_IDENTIFIER & OBJECT IDENTIFIER \\ 4238 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_IA5\_STRING & IA5 STRING (one octet per char) \\ 4239 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_UTF8\_STRING & UTF8 STRING (one wchar\_t per char) \\ 4240 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_PRINTABLE\_STRING & PRINTABLE STRING (one octet per char) \\ 4241 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_UTCTIME & UTCTIME (see ltc\_utctime structure) \\ 4242 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_SEQUENCE & SEQUENCE (and SEQUENCE OF) \\ 4243 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_SET & SET \\ 4244 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_SETOF & SET OF \\ 4245 \hline LTC\_ASN1\_CHOICE & CHOICE \\ 4246 \hline 4247 \end{tabular} 4248 \caption{List of ASN.1 Supported Types} 4249 \end{small} 4250 \end{center} 4251 \end{figure} 4252 4253 \subsection{SEQUENCE Type} 4254 The SEQUENCE data type is a collection of other ASN.1 data types encapsulated with a small header which is a useful way of sending multiple data types in one packet. 4255 4256 \subsubsection{SEQUENCE Encoding} 4257 To encode a sequence a \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} array must be initialized with the members of the sequence and their respective pointers. The encoding is performed 4258 with the following function. 4259 4260 \index{der\_encode\_sequence()} 4261 \begin{verbatim} 4262 int der_encode_sequence(ltc_asn1_list *list, 4263 unsigned long inlen, 4264 unsigned char *out, 4265 unsigned long *outlen); 4266 \end{verbatim} 4267 This encodes a sequence of items pointed to by \textit{list} where the list has \textit{inlen} items in it. The SEQUENCE will be encoded to \textit{out} and of length \textit{outlen}. The 4268 function will terminate when it reads all the items out of the list (upto \textit{inlen}) or it encounters an item in the list with a type of \textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}. 4269 4270 The \textit{data} pointer in the list would be the same pointer you would pass to the respective ASN.1 encoder (e.g. der\_encode\_bit\_string()) and it is simply passed on 4271 verbatim to the dependent encoder. The list can contain other SEQUENCE or SET types which enables you to have nested SEQUENCE and SET definitions. In these cases 4272 the \textit{data} pointer is simply a pointer to another \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list}. 4273 4274 \subsubsection{SEQUENCE Decoding} 4275 4276 \index{der\_decode\_sequence()} 4277 4278 Decoding a SEQUENCE is similar to encoding. You set up an array of \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} where in this case the \textit{size} member is the maximum size 4279 (in certain cases). For types such as IA5 STRING, BIT STRING, OCTET STRING (etc) the \textit{size} field is updated after successful decoding to reflect how many 4280 units of the respective type has been loaded. 4281 4282 \begin{verbatim} 4283 int der_decode_sequence(const unsigned char *in, 4284 unsigned long inlen, 4285 ltc_asn1_list *list, 4286 unsigned long outlen); 4287 \end{verbatim} 4288 4289 This will decode upto \textit{outlen} items from the input buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. The function will stop (gracefully) when it runs out of items to decode. 4290 It will fail (for among other reasons) when it runs out of input bytes to read, a data type is invalid or a heap failure occurred. 4291 4292 For the following types the \textit{size} field will be updated to reflect the number of units read of the given type. 4293 \begin{enumerate} 4294 \item BIT STRING 4295 \item OCTET STRING 4296 \item OBJECT IDENTIFIER 4297 \item IA5 STRING 4298 \item PRINTABLE STRING 4299 \end{enumerate} 4300 4301 \subsubsection{SEQUENCE Length} 4302 4303 The length of a SEQUENCE can be determined with the following function. 4304 4305 \index{der\_length\_sequence()} 4306 \begin{verbatim} 4307 int der_length_sequence(ltc_asn1_list *list, 4308 unsigned long inlen, 4309 unsigned long *outlen); 4310 \end{verbatim} 4311 4312 This will get the encoding size for the given \textit{list} of length \textit{inlen} and store it in \textit{outlen}. 4313 4314 \subsubsection{SEQUENCE Multiple Argument Lists} 4315 4316 For small or simple sequences an encoding or decoding can be performed with one of the following two functions. 4317 4318 \index{der\_encode\_sequence\_multi()} 4319 \index{der\_decode\_sequence\_multi()} 4320 4321 \begin{verbatim} 4322 int der_encode_sequence_multi(unsigned char *out, 4323 unsigned long *outlen, ...); 4324 4325 int der_decode_sequence_multi(const unsigned char *in, 4326 unsigned long inlen, ...); 4327 \end{verbatim} 4328 4329 These either encode or decode (respectively) a SEQUENCE data type where the items in the sequence are specified after the length parameter. 4330 4331 The list of items are specified as a triple of the form \textit{(type, size, data)} where \textit{type} is an \textbf{int}, \textit{size} is a \textbf{unsigned long} 4332 and \textit{data} is \textbf{void} pointer. The list of items must be terminated with an item with the type \textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}. 4333 4334 It is ideal that you cast the \textit{size} values to unsigned long to ensure that the proper data type is passed to the function. Constants such as \textit{1} without 4335 a cast or prototype are of type \textbf{int} by default. Appending \textit{UL} or pre-pending \textit{(unsigned long)} is enough to cast it to the correct type. 4336 4337 \begin{small} 4338 \begin{verbatim} 4339 unsigned char buf[MAXBUFSIZE]; 4340 unsigned long buflen; 4341 int err; 4342 4343 buflen = sizeof(buf); 4344 if ((err = 4345 der_encode_sequence_multi(buf, &buflen, 4346 LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, 5UL, "Hello", 4347 LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, 7UL, " World!", 4348 LTC_ASN1_EOL, 0UL, NULL)) != CRYPT_OK) { 4349 // error handling 4350 } 4351 \end{verbatim} 4352 \end{small} 4353 4354 This example encodes a SEQUENCE with two IA5 STRING types containing ``Hello'' and `` World!'' respectively. Note the usage of the \textbf{UL} modifier 4355 on the size parameters. This forces the compiler to pass the numbers as the required \textbf{unsigned long} type that the function expects. 4356 4357 \subsection{SET and SET OF} 4358 4359 \index{SET} \index{SET OF} 4360 SET and SET OF are related to the SEQUENCE type in that they can be pretty much be decoded with the same code. However, they are different, and they should 4361 be carefully noted. The SET type is an unordered array of ASN.1 types sorted by the TAG (type identifier), whereas the SET OF type is an ordered array of 4362 a \textbf{single} ASN.1 object sorted in ascending order by the DER their respective encodings. 4363 4364 \subsubsection{SET Encoding} 4365 4366 SETs use the same array structure of ltc\_asn1\_list that the SEQUENCE functions use. They are encoded with the following function: 4367 4368 \index{der\_encode\_set()} 4369 \begin{verbatim} 4370 int der_encode_set(ltc_asn1_list *list, 4371 unsigned long inlen, 4372 unsigned char *out, 4373 unsigned long *outlen); 4374 \end{verbatim} 4375 4376 This will encode the list of ASN.1 objects in \textit{list} of length \textit{inlen} objects, and store the output in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} bytes. 4377 The function will make a copy of the list provided, and sort it by the TAG. Objects with identical TAGs are additionally sorted on their original placement in the 4378 array (to make the process deterministic). 4379 4380 This function will \textbf{NOT} recognize \textit{DEFAULT} objects, and it is the responsibility of the caller to remove them as required. 4381 4382 \subsubsection{SET Decoding} 4383 4384 The SET type can be decoded with the following function. 4385 4386 \index{der\_decode\_set()} 4387 \begin{verbatim} 4388 int der_decode_set(const unsigned char *in, 4389 unsigned long inlen, 4390 ltc_asn1_list *list, 4391 unsigned long outlen); 4392 \end{verbatim} 4393 4394 This will decode the SET specified by \textit{list} of length \textit{outlen} objects from the input buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets. 4395 4396 It handles the fact that SETs are not strictly ordered and will make multiple passes (as required) through the list to decode all the objects. 4397 4398 \subsubsection{SET Length} 4399 The length of a SET can be determined by calling der\_length\_sequence() since they have the same encoding length. 4400 4401 \subsubsection{SET OF Encoding} 4402 A \textit{SET OF} object is an array of identical objects (e.g. OCTET STRING) sorted in ascending order by the DER encoding of the object. They are 4403 used to store objects deterministically based solely on their encoding. It uses the same array structure of ltc\_asn1\_list that the SEQUENCE functions 4404 use. They are encoded with the following function. 4405 4406 \index{der\_encode\_setof()} 4407 \begin{verbatim} 4408 int der_encode_setof(ltc_asn1_list *list, 4409 unsigned long inlen, 4410 unsigned char *out, 4411 unsigned long *outlen); 4412 \end{verbatim} 4413 4414 This will encode a \textit{SET OF} containing the \textit{list} of \textit{inlen} ASN.1 objects and store the encoding in the output buffer \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}. 4415 4416 The routine will first encode the SET OF in an unordered fashion (in a temporary buffer) then sort using the XQSORT macro and copy back to the output buffer. This 4417 means you need at least enough memory to keep an additional copy of the output on the heap. 4418 4419 \subsubsection{SET OF Decoding} 4420 Since the decoding of a \textit{SET OF} object is unambiguous it can be decoded with der\_decode\_sequence(). 4421 4422 \subsubsection{SET OF Length} 4423 Like the SET type the der\_length\_sequence() function can be used to determine the length of a \textit{SET OF} object. 4424 4425 \subsection{ASN.1 INTEGER} 4426 4427 To encode or decode INTEGER data types use the following functions. 4428 4429 \index{der\_encode\_integer()}\index{der\_decode\_integer()}\index{der\_length\_integer()} 4430 \begin{verbatim} 4431 int der_encode_integer( void *num, 4432 unsigned char *out, 4433 unsigned long *outlen); 4434 4435 int der_decode_integer(const unsigned char *in, 4436 unsigned long inlen, 4437 void *num); 4438 4439 int der_length_integer( void *num, 4440 unsigned long *len); 4441 \end{verbatim} 4442 4443 These will encode or decode a signed INTEGER data type using the bignum data type to store the large INTEGER. To encode smaller values without allocating 4444 a bignum to store the value, the \textit{short} INTEGER functions were made available. 4445 4446 \index{der\_encode\_short\_integer()}\index{der\_decode\_short\_integer()}\index{der\_length\_short\_integer()} 4447 \begin{verbatim} 4448 int der_encode_short_integer(unsigned long num, 4449 unsigned char *out, 4450 unsigned long *outlen); 4451 4452 int der_decode_short_integer(const unsigned char *in, 4453 unsigned long inlen, 4454 unsigned long *num); 4455 4456 int der_length_short_integer(unsigned long num, 4457 unsigned long *outlen); 4458 \end{verbatim} 4459 4460 These will encode or decode an unsigned \textbf{unsigned long} type (only reads upto 32--bits). For values in the range $0 \dots 2^{32} - 1$ the integer 4461 and short integer functions can encode and decode each others outputs. 4462 4463 \subsection{ASN.1 BIT STRING} 4464 4465 \index{der\_encode\_bit\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_bit\_string()}\index{der\_length\_bit\_string()} 4466 \begin{verbatim} 4467 int der_encode_bit_string(const unsigned char *in, 4468 unsigned long inlen, 4469 unsigned char *out, 4470 unsigned long *outlen); 4471 4472 int der_decode_bit_string(const unsigned char *in, 4473 unsigned long inlen, 4474 unsigned char *out, 4475 unsigned long *outlen); 4476 4477 int der_length_bit_string(unsigned long nbits, 4478 unsigned long *outlen); 4479 \end{verbatim} 4480 4481 These will encode or decode a BIT STRING data type. The bits are passed in (or read out) using one \textbf{char} per bit. A non--zero value will be interpreted 4482 as a one bit, and a zero value a zero bit. 4483 4484 \subsection{ASN.1 OCTET STRING} 4485 4486 \index{der\_encode\_octet\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_octet\_string()}\index{der\_length\_octet\_string()} 4487 \begin{verbatim} 4488 int der_encode_octet_string(const unsigned char *in, 4489 unsigned long inlen, 4490 unsigned char *out, 4491 unsigned long *outlen); 4492 4493 int der_decode_octet_string(const unsigned char *in, 4494 unsigned long inlen, 4495 unsigned char *out, 4496 unsigned long *outlen); 4497 4498 int der_length_octet_string(unsigned long noctets, 4499 unsigned long *outlen); 4500 \end{verbatim} 4501 4502 These will encode or decode an OCTET STRING data type. The octets are stored using one \textbf{unsigned char} each. 4503 4504 \subsection{ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER} 4505 4506 \index{der\_encode\_object\_identifier()}\index{der\_decode\_object\_identifier()}\index{der\_length\_object\_identifier()} 4507 \begin{verbatim} 4508 int der_encode_object_identifier(unsigned long *words, 4509 unsigned long nwords, 4510 unsigned char *out, 4511 unsigned long *outlen); 4512 4513 int der_decode_object_identifier(const unsigned char *in, 4514 unsigned long inlen, 4515 unsigned long *words, 4516 unsigned long *outlen); 4517 4518 int der_length_object_identifier(unsigned long *words, 4519 unsigned long nwords, 4520 unsigned long *outlen); 4521 \end{verbatim} 4522 4523 These will encode or decode an OBJECT IDENTIFIER object. The words of the OID are stored in individual \textbf{unsigned long} elements, and must be in the range 4524 $0 \ldots 2^{32} - 1$. 4525 4526 \subsection{ASN.1 IA5 STRING} 4527 4528 \index{der\_encode\_ia5\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_ia5\_string()}\index{der\_length\_ia5\_string()} 4529 \begin{verbatim} 4530 int der_encode_ia5_string(const unsigned char *in, 4531 unsigned long inlen, 4532 unsigned char *out, 4533 unsigned long *outlen); 4534 4535 int der_decode_ia5_string(const unsigned char *in, 4536 unsigned long inlen, 4537 unsigned char *out, 4538 unsigned long *outlen); 4539 4540 int der_length_ia5_string(const unsigned char *octets, 4541 unsigned long noctets, 4542 unsigned long *outlen); 4543 \end{verbatim} 4544 4545 These will encode or decode an IA5 STRING. The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{char} elements. These functions performs internal character 4546 to numerical conversions based on the conventions of the compiler being used. For instance, on an x86\_32 machine 'A' == 65 but the same may not be true on 4547 say a SPARC machine. Internally, these functions have a table of literal characters and their numerical ASCII values. This provides a stable conversion provided 4548 that the build platform honours the run--time platforms character conventions. 4549 4550 \subsection{ASN.1 PRINTABLE STRING} 4551 4552 \index{der\_encode\_printable\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_printable\_string()}\index{der\_length\_printable\_string()} 4553 \begin{verbatim} 4554 int der_encode_printable_string(const unsigned char *in, 4555 unsigned long inlen, 4556 unsigned char *out, 4557 unsigned long *outlen); 4558 4559 int der_decode_printable_string(const unsigned char *in, 4560 unsigned long inlen, 4561 unsigned char *out, 4562 unsigned long *outlen); 4563 4564 int der_length_printable_string(const unsigned char *octets, 4565 unsigned long noctets, 4566 unsigned long *outlen); 4567 \end{verbatim} 4568 4569 These will encode or decode an PRINTABLE STRING. The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{char} elements. These functions performs internal character 4570 to numerical conversions based on the conventions of the compiler being used. For instance, on an x86\_32 machine 'A' == 65 but the same may not be true on 4571 say a SPARC machine. Internally, these functions have a table of literal characters and their numerical ASCII values. This provides a stable conversion provided 4572 that the build platform honours the run-time platforms character conventions. 4573 4574 \subsection{ASN.1 UTF8 STRING} 4575 4576 \index{der\_encode\_utf8\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_utf8\_string()}\index{der\_length\_utf8\_string()} 4577 \begin{verbatim} 4578 int der_encode_utf8_string(const wchar_t *in, 4579 unsigned long inlen, 4580 unsigned char *out, 4581 unsigned long *outlen); 4582 4583 int der_decode_utf8_string(const unsigned char *in, 4584 unsigned long inlen, 4585 wchar_t *out, 4586 unsigned long *outlen); 4587 4588 int der_length_utf8_string(const wchar_t *octets, 4589 unsigned long noctets, 4590 unsigned long *outlen); 4591 \end{verbatim} 4592 4593 These will encode or decode an UTF8 STRING. The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{wchar\_t} elements. These function performs no internal 4594 mapping and treat the characters as literals. 4595 4596 These functions use the \textbf{wchar\_t} type which is not universally available. In those cases, the library will typedef it to \textbf{unsigned long}. If you 4597 intend to use the ISO C functions for working with wide--char arrays, you should make sure that wchar\_t has been defined previously. 4598 4599 \subsection{ASN.1 UTCTIME} 4600 4601 The UTCTIME type is to store a date and time in ASN.1 format. It uses the following structure to organize the time. 4602 4603 \index{ltc\_utctime structure} 4604 \begin{verbatim} 4605 typedef struct { 4606 unsigned YY, /* year 00--99 */ 4607 MM, /* month 01--12 */ 4608 DD, /* day 01--31 */ 4609 hh, /* hour 00--23 */ 4610 mm, /* minute 00--59 */ 4611 ss, /* second 00--59 */ 4612 off_dir, /* timezone offset direction 0 == +, 1 == - */ 4613 off_hh, /* timezone offset hours */ 4614 off_mm; /* timezone offset minutes */ 4615 } ltc_utctime; 4616 \end{verbatim} 4617 4618 The time can be offset plus or minus a set amount of hours (off\_hh) and minutes (off\_mm). When \textit{off\_dir} is zero, the time will be added otherwise it 4619 will be subtracted. For instance, the array $\lbrace 5, 6, 20, 22, 4, 00, 0, 5, 0 \rbrace$ represents the current time of 4620 \textit{2005, June 20th, 22:04:00} with a time offset of +05h00. 4621 4622 \index{der\_encode\_utctime()}\index{der\_decode\_utctime()}\index{der\_length\_utctime()} 4623 \begin{verbatim} 4624 int der_encode_utctime( ltc_utctime *utctime, 4625 unsigned char *out, 4626 unsigned long *outlen); 4627 4628 int der_decode_utctime(const unsigned char *in, 4629 unsigned long *inlen, 4630 ltc_utctime *out); 4631 4632 int der_length_utctime( ltc_utctime *utctime, 4633 unsigned long *outlen); 4634 \end{verbatim} 4635 4636 The encoder will store time in one of the two ASN.1 formats, either \textit{YYMMDDhhmmssZ} or \textit{YYMMDDhhmmss$\pm$hhmm}, and perform minimal error checking on the 4637 input. The decoder will read all valid ASN.1 formats and perform range checking on the values (not complete but rational) useful for catching packet errors. 4638 4639 It is suggested that decoded data be further scrutinized (e.g. days of month in particular). 4640 4641 \subsection{ASN.1 CHOICE} 4642 4643 The CHOICE ASN.1 type represents a union of ASN.1 types all of which are stored in a \textit{ltc\_asn1\_list}. There is no encoder for the CHOICE type, only a 4644 decoder. The decoder will scan through the provided list attempting to use the appropriate decoder on the input packet. The list can contain any ASN.1 data 4645 type\footnote{Except it cannot have LTC\_ASN1\_INTEGER and LTC\_ASN1\_SHORT\_INTEGER simultaneously.} except for other CHOICE types. 4646 4647 There is no encoder for the CHOICE type as the actual DER encoding is the encoding of the chosen type. 4648 4649 \index{der\_decode\_choice()} 4650 \begin{verbatim} 4651 int der_decode_choice(const unsigned char *in, 4652 unsigned long *inlen, 4653 ltc_asn1_list *list, 4654 unsigned long outlen); 4655 \end{verbatim} 4656 4657 This will decode the input in the \textit{in} field of length \textit{inlen}. It uses the provided ASN.1 list specified in the \textit{list} field which has 4658 \textit{outlen} elements. The \textit{inlen} field will be updated with the length of the decoded data type, as well as the respective entry in the \textit{list} field 4659 will have the \textit{used} flag set to non--zero to reflect it was the data type decoded. 4660 4661 \subsection{ASN.1 Flexi Decoder} 4662 The ASN.1 \textit{flexi} decoder allows the developer to decode arbitrary ASN.1 DER packets (provided they use data types LibTomCrypt supports) without first knowing 4663 the structure of the data. Where der\_decode \_sequence() requires the developer to specify the data types to decode in advance the flexi decoder is entirely 4664 free form. 4665 4666 The flexi decoder uses the same \textit{ltc\_asn1\_list} but instead of being stored in an array it uses the linked list pointers \textit{prev}, \textit{next}, \textit{parent} 4667 and \textit{child}. The list works as a \textit{doubly-linked list} structure where decoded items at the same level are siblings (using next and prev) and items 4668 encoded in a SEQUENCE are stored as a child element. 4669 4670 When a SEQUENCE or SET has been encountered a SEQUENCE (or SET resp.) item will be added as a sibling (e.g. list.type == LTC\_ASN1\_SEQUENCE) and the child 4671 pointer points to a new list of items contained within the object. 4672 4673 \index{der\_decode\_sequence\_flexi()} 4674 \begin{verbatim} 4675 int der_decode_sequence_flexi(const unsigned char *in, 4676 unsigned long *inlen, 4677 ltc_asn1_list **out); 4678 \end{verbatim} 4679 4680 This will decode items in the \textit{in} buffer of max input length \textit{inlen} and store the newly created pointer to the list in \textit{out}. This function allocates 4681 all required memory for the decoding. It stores the number of octets read back into \textit{inlen}. 4682 4683 The function will terminate when either it hits an invalid ASN.1 tag, or it reads \textit{inlen} octets. An early termination is a soft error, and returns 4684 normally. The decoded list \textit{out} will point to the very first element of the list (e.g. both parent and prev pointers will be \textbf{NULL}). 4685 4686 An invalid decoding will terminate the process, and free the allocated memory automatically. 4687 4688 \textbf{Note:} the list decoded by this function is \textbf{NOT} in the correct form for der\_encode\_sequence() to use directly. You will have to first 4689 have to convert the list by first storing all of the siblings in an array then storing all the children as sub-lists of a sequence using the \textit{.data} 4690 pointer. Currently no function in LibTomCrypt provides this ability. 4691 4692 \subsubsection{Sample Decoding} 4693 Suppose we decode the following structure: 4694 \begin{small} 4695 \begin{verbatim} 4696 User ::= SEQUENCE { 4697 Name IA5 STRING 4698 LoginToken SEQUENCE { 4699 passwdHash OCTET STRING 4700 pubkey ECCPublicKey 4701 } 4702 LastOn UTCTIME 4703 } 4704 \end{verbatim} 4705 \end{small} 4706 \begin{flushleft}and we decoded it with the following code:\end{flushleft} 4707 4708 \begin{small} 4709 \begin{verbatim} 4710 unsigned char inbuf[MAXSIZE]; 4711 unsigned long inbuflen; 4712 ltc_asn1_list *list; 4713 int err; 4714 4715 /* somehow fill inbuf/inbuflen */ 4716 if ((err = der_decode_sequence_flexi(inbuf, inbuflen, &list)) != CRYPT_OK) { 4717 printf("Error decoding: %s\n", error_to_string(err)); 4718 exit(EXIT_FAILURE); 4719 } 4720 \end{verbatim} 4721 \end{small} 4722 4723 At this point \textit{list} would point to the SEQUENCE identified by \textit{User}. It would have no sibblings (prev or next), and only a child node. Walking to the child 4724 node with the following code will bring us to the \textit{Name} portion of the SEQUENCE: 4725 \begin{small} 4726 \begin{verbatim} 4727 list = list->child; 4728 \end{verbatim} 4729 \end{small} 4730 Now \textit{list} points to the \textit{Name} member (with the tag IA5 STRING). The \textit{data}, \textit{size}, and \textit{type} members of \textit{list} should reflect 4731 that of an IA5 STRING. The sibbling will now be the \textit{LoginToken} SEQUENCE. The sibbling has a child node which points to the \textit{passwdHash} OCTET STRING. 4732 We can walk to this node with the following code: 4733 \begin{small} 4734 \begin{verbatim} 4735 /* list already pointing to 'Name' */ 4736 list = list->next->child; 4737 \end{verbatim} 4738 \end{small} 4739 At this point, \textit{list} will point to the \textit{passwdHash} member of the innermost SEQUENCE. This node has a sibbling, the \textit{pubkey} member of the SEQUENCE. 4740 The \textit{LastOn} member of the SEQUENCE is a sibbling of the LoginToken node, if we wanted to walk there we would have to go up and over via: 4741 \begin{small} 4742 \begin{verbatim} 4743 list = list->parent->next; 4744 \end{verbatim} 4745 \end{small} 4746 At this point, we are pointing to the last node of the list. Lists are terminated in all directions by a \textbf{NULL} pointer. All nodes are doubly linked so that you 4747 can walk up and down the nodes without keeping pointers lying around. 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 \subsubsection{Free'ing a Flexi List} 4754 To free the list use the following function. 4755 4756 \index{der\_sequence\_free()} 4757 \begin{verbatim} 4758 void der_sequence_free(ltc_asn1_list *in); 4759 \end{verbatim} 4760 4761 This will free all of the memory allocated by der\_decode\_sequence\_flexi(). 4762 4763 \mysection{Password Based Cryptography} 4764 \subsection{PKCS \#5} 4765 \index{PKCS \#5} 4766 In order to securely handle user passwords for the purposes of creating session keys and chaining IVs the PKCS \#5 was drafted. PKCS \#5 4767 is made up of two algorithms, Algorithm One and Algorithm Two. Algorithm One is the older fairly limited algorithm which has been implemented 4768 for completeness. Algorithm Two is a bit more modern and more flexible to work with. 4769 4770 \subsection{Algorithm One} 4771 Algorithm One accepts as input a password, an 8--byte salt, and an iteration counter. The iteration counter is meant to act as delay for 4772 people trying to brute force guess the password. The higher the iteration counter the longer the delay. This algorithm also requires a hash 4773 algorithm and produces an output no longer than the output of the hash. 4774 4775 \index{pkcs\_5\_alg1()} 4776 \begin{alltt} 4777 int pkcs_5_alg1(const unsigned char *password, 4778 unsigned long password_len, 4779 const unsigned char *salt, 4780 int iteration_count, 4781 int hash_idx, 4782 unsigned char *out, 4783 unsigned long *outlen) 4784 \end{alltt} 4785 Where \textit{password} is the user's password. Since the algorithm allows binary passwords you must also specify the length in \textit{password\_len}. 4786 The \textit{salt} is a fixed size 8--byte array which should be random for each user and session. The \textit{iteration\_count} is the delay desired 4787 on the password. The \textit{hash\_idx} is the index of the hash you wish to use in the descriptor table. 4788 4789 The output of length up to \textit{outlen} is stored in \textit{out}. If \textit{outlen} is initially larger than the size of the hash functions output 4790 it is set to the number of bytes stored. If it is smaller than not all of the hash output is stored in \textit{out}. 4791 4792 \subsection{Algorithm Two} 4793 4794 Algorithm Two is the recommended algorithm for this task. It allows variable length salts, and can produce outputs larger than the 4795 hash functions output. As such, it can easily be used to derive session keys for ciphers and MACs as well initial vectors as required 4796 from a single password and invocation of this algorithm. 4797 4798 \index{pkcs\_5\_alg2()} 4799 \begin{alltt} 4800 int pkcs_5_alg2(const unsigned char *password, 4801 unsigned long password_len, 4802 const unsigned char *salt, 4803 unsigned long salt_len, 4804 int iteration_count, 4805 int hash_idx, 4806 unsigned char *out, 4807 unsigned long *outlen) 4808 \end{alltt} 4809 Where \textit{password} is the users password. Since the algorithm allows binary passwords you must also specify the length in \textit{password\_len}. 4810 The \textit{salt} is an array of size \textit{salt\_len}. It should be random for each user and session. The \textit{iteration\_count} is the delay desired 4811 on the password. The \textit{hash\_idx} is the index of the hash you wish to use in the descriptor table. The output of length up to 4812 \textit{outlen} is stored in \textit{out}. 4813 4814 \begin{verbatim} 4815 /* demo to show how to make session state material 4816 * from a password */ 4817 #include <tomcrypt.h> 4818 int main(void) 4819 { 4820 unsigned char password[100], salt[100], 4821 cipher_key[16], cipher_iv[16], 4822 mac_key[16], outbuf[48]; 4823 int err, hash_idx; 4824 unsigned long outlen, password_len, salt_len; 4825 4826 /* register hash and get it's idx .... */ 4827 4828 /* get users password and make up a salt ... */ 4829 4830 /* create the material (100 iterations in algorithm) */ 4831 outlen = sizeof(outbuf); 4832 if ((err = pkcs_5_alg2(password, password_len, salt, 4833 salt_len, 100, hash_idx, outbuf, 4834 &outlen)) 4835 != CRYPT_OK) { 4836 /* error handle */ 4837 } 4838 4839 /* now extract it */ 4840 memcpy(cipher_key, outbuf, 16); 4841 memcpy(cipher_iv, outbuf+16, 16); 4842 memcpy(mac_key, outbuf+32, 16); 4843 4844 /* use material (recall to store the salt in the output) */ 4845 } 4846 \end{verbatim} 4847 4848 \chapter{Miscellaneous} 4849 \mysection{Base64 Encoding and Decoding} 4850 The library provides functions to encode and decode a RFC 1521 base--64 coding scheme. The characters used in the mappings are: 4851 \begin{verbatim} 4852 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789+/ 4853 \end{verbatim} 4854 Those characters are supported in the 7-bit ASCII map, which means they can be used for transport over 4855 common e-mail, usenet and HTTP mediums. The format of an encoded stream is just a literal sequence of ASCII characters 4856 where a group of four represent 24-bits of input. The first four chars of the encoders output is the length of the 4857 original input. After the first four characters is the rest of the message. 4858 4859 Often, it is desirable to line wrap the output to fit nicely in an e-mail or usenet posting. The decoder allows you to 4860 put any character (that is not in the above sequence) in between any character of the encoders output. You may not however, 4861 break up the first four characters. 4862 4863 To encode a binary string in base64 call: 4864 \index{base64\_encode()} \index{base64\_decode()} 4865 \begin{verbatim} 4866 int base64_encode(const unsigned char *in, 4867 unsigned long len, 4868 unsigned char *out, 4869 unsigned long *outlen); 4870 \end{verbatim} 4871 Where \textit{in} is the binary string and \textit{out} is where the ASCII output is placed. You must set the value of \textit{outlen} prior 4872 to calling this function and it sets the length of the base64 output in \textit{outlen} when it is done. To decode a base64 4873 string call: 4874 \begin{verbatim} 4875 int base64_decode(const unsigned char *in, 4876 unsigned long len, 4877 unsigned char *out, 4878 unsigned long *outlen); 4879 \end{verbatim} 4880 4881 \mysection{Primality Testing} 4882 \index{Primality Testing} 4883 The library includes primality testing and random prime functions as well. The primality tester will perform the test in 4884 two phases. First it will perform trial division by the first few primes. Second it will perform eight rounds of the 4885 Rabin-Miller primality testing algorithm. If the candidate passes both phases it is declared prime otherwise it is declared 4886 composite. No prime number will fail the two phases but composites can. Each round of the Rabin-Miller algorithm reduces 4887 the probability of a pseudo-prime by $1 \over 4$ therefore after sixteen rounds the probability is no more than 4888 $\left ( { 1 \over 4 } \right )^{8} = 2^{-16}$. In practice the probability of error is in fact much lower than that. 4889 4890 When making random primes the trial division step is in fact an optimized implementation of \textit{Implementation of Fast RSA Key Generation on Smart Cards}\footnote{Chenghuai Lu, Andre L. M. dos Santos and Francisco R. Pimentel}. 4891 In essence a table of machine-word sized residues are kept of a candidate modulo a set of primes. When the candidate 4892 is rejected and ultimately incremented to test the next number the residues are updated without using multi-word precision 4893 math operations. As a result the routine can scan ahead to the next number required for testing with very little work 4894 involved. 4895 4896 In the event that a composite did make it through it would most likely cause the the algorithm trying to use it to fail. For 4897 instance, in RSA two primes $p$ and $q$ are required. The order of the multiplicative sub-group (modulo $pq$) is given 4898 as $\phi(pq)$ or $(p - 1)(q - 1)$. The decryption exponent $d$ is found as $de \equiv 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod } \phi(pq))$. If either $p$ or $q$ is composite the value of $d$ will be incorrect and the user 4899 will not be able to sign or decrypt messages at all. Suppose $p$ was prime and $q$ was composite this is just a variation of 4900 the multi-prime RSA. Suppose $q = rs$ for two primes $r$ and $s$ then $\phi(pq) = (p - 1)(r - 1)(s - 1)$ which clearly is 4901 not equal to $(p - 1)(rs - 1)$. 4902 4903 These are not technically part of the LibTomMath library but this is the best place to document them. 4904 To test if a \textit{mp\_int} is prime call: 4905 \begin{verbatim} 4906 int is_prime(mp_int *N, int *result); 4907 \end{verbatim} 4908 This puts a one in \textit{result} if the number is probably prime, otherwise it places a zero in it. It is assumed that if 4909 it returns an error that the value in \textit{result} is undefined. To make 4910 a random prime call: 4911 \begin{verbatim} 4912 int rand_prime( mp_int *N, 4913 unsigned long len, 4914 prng_state *prng, 4915 int wprng); 4916 \end{verbatim} 4917 Where \textit{len} is the size of the prime in bytes ($2 \le len \le 256$). You can set \textit{len} to the negative size you want 4918 to get a prime of the form $p \equiv 3\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod } 4)$. So if you want a 1024-bit prime of this sort pass 4919 \textit{len = -128} to the function. Upon success it will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} and \textit{N} will contain an integer which 4920 is very likely prime. 4921 4922 \chapter{Programming Guidelines} 4923 4924 \mysection{Secure Pseudo Random Number Generators} 4925 Probably the single most vulnerable point of any cryptosystem is the PRNG. Without one, generating and protecting secrets 4926 would be impossible. The requirement that one be setup correctly is vitally important, and to address this point the library 4927 does provide two RNG sources that will address the largest amount of end users as possible. The \textit{sprng} PRNG provides an easy to 4928 access source of entropy for any application on a UNIX (and the like) or Windows computer. 4929 4930 However, when the end user is not on one of these platforms, the application developer must address the issue of finding 4931 entropy. This manual is not designed to be a text on cryptography. I would just like to highlight that when you design 4932 a cryptosystem make sure the first problem you solve is getting a fresh source of entropy. 4933 4934 \mysection{Preventing Trivial Errors} 4935 Two simple ways to prevent trivial errors is to prevent overflows, and to check the return values. All of the functions 4936 which output variable length strings will require you to pass the length of the destination. If the size of your output 4937 buffer is smaller than the output it will report an error. Therefore, make sure the size you pass is correct! 4938 4939 Also, virtually all of the functions return an error code or {\bf CRYPT\_OK}. You should detect all errors, as simple 4940 typos can cause algorithms to fail to work as desired. 4941 4942 \mysection{Registering Your Algorithms} 4943 To avoid linking and other run--time errors it is important to register the ciphers, hashes and PRNGs you intend to use 4944 before you try to use them. This includes any function which would use an algorithm indirectly through a descriptor table. 4945 4946 A neat bonus to the registry system is that you can add external algorithms that are not part of the library without 4947 having to hack the library. For example, suppose you have a hardware specific PRNG on your system. You could easily 4948 write the few functions required plus a descriptor. After registering your PRNG, all of the library functions that 4949 need a PRNG can instantly take advantage of it. The same applies for ciphers, hashes, and bignum math routines. 4950 4951 \mysection{Key Sizes} 4952 4953 \subsection{Symmetric Ciphers} 4954 For symmetric ciphers, use as large as of a key as possible. For the most part \textit{bits are cheap} so using a 256--bit key 4955 is not a hard thing to do. As a good rule of thumb do not use a key smaller than 128 bits. 4956 4957 \subsection{Asymmetric Ciphers} 4958 The following chart gives the work factor for solving a DH/RSA public key using the NFS. The work factor for a key of order 4959 $n$ is estimated to be 4960 \begin{equation} 4961 e^{1.923 \cdot ln(n)^{1 \over 3} \cdot ln(ln(n))^{2 \over 3}} 4962 \end{equation} 4963 4964 Note that $n$ is not the bit-length but the magnitude. For example, for a 1024-bit key $n = 2^{1024}$. The work required 4965 is: 4966 \begin{figure}[here] 4967 \begin{center} 4968 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|} 4969 \hline RSA/DH Key Size (bits) & Work Factor ($log_2$) \\ 4970 \hline 512 & 63.92 \\ 4971 \hline 768 & 76.50 \\ 4972 \hline 1024 & 86.76 \\ 4973 \hline 1536 & 103.37 \\ 4974 \hline 2048 & 116.88 \\ 4975 \hline 2560 & 128.47 \\ 4976 \hline 3072 & 138.73 \\ 4977 \hline 4096 & 156.49 \\ 4978 \hline 4979 \end{tabular} 4980 \end{center} 4981 \caption{RSA/DH Key Strength} 4982 \end{figure} 4983 4984 The work factor for ECC keys is much higher since the best attack is still fully exponential. Given a key of magnitude 4985 $n$ it requires $\sqrt n$ work. The following table summarizes the work required: 4986 \begin{figure}[here] 4987 \begin{center} 4988 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|} 4989 \hline ECC Key Size (bits) & Work Factor ($log_2$) \\ 4990 \hline 112 & 56 \\ 4991 \hline 128 & 64 \\ 4992 \hline 160 & 80 \\ 4993 \hline 192 & 96 \\ 4994 \hline 224 & 112 \\ 4995 \hline 256 & 128 \\ 4996 \hline 384 & 192 \\ 4997 \hline 521 & 260.5 \\ 4998 \hline 4999 \end{tabular} 5000 \end{center} 5001 \caption{ECC Key Strength} 5002 \end{figure} 5003 5004 Using the above tables the following suggestions for key sizes seems appropriate: 5005 \begin{center} 5006 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} 5007 \hline Security Goal & RSA/DH Key Size (bits) & ECC Key Size (bits) \\ 5008 \hline Near term & 1024 & 160 \\ 5009 \hline Short term & 1536 & 192 \\ 5010 \hline Long Term & 2560 & 384 \\ 5011 \hline 5012 \end{tabular} 5013 \end{center} 5014 5015 \mysection{Thread Safety} 5016 The library is not fully thread safe but several simple precautions can be taken to avoid any problems. The registry functions 5017 such as register\_cipher() are not thread safe no matter what you do. It is best to call them from your programs initialization 5018 code before threads are initiated. 5019 5020 The rest of the code uses state variables you must pass it such as hash\_state, hmac\_state, etc. This means that if each 5021 thread has its own state variables then they will not affect each other, and are fully thread safe. This is fairly simple with symmetric ciphers 5022 and hashes. 5023 5024 \index{LTC\_PTHREAD} 5025 The only sticky issue is a shared PRNG which can be alleviated with the careful use of mutex devices. Defining LTC\_PTHREAD for instance, enables 5026 pthreads based mutex locking in various routines such as the Yarrow and Fortuna PRNGs, the fixed point ECC multiplier, and other routines. 5027 5028 \chapter{Configuring and Building the Library} 5029 \mysection{Introduction} 5030 The library is fairly flexible about how it can be built, used, and generally distributed. Additions are being made with 5031 each new release that will make the library even more flexible. Each of the classes of functions can be disabled during 5032 the build process to make a smaller library. This is particularly useful for shared libraries. 5033 5034 As of v1.06 of the library, the build process has been moved to two steps for the typical LibTomCrypt application. This is because 5035 LibTomCrypt no longer provides a math API on its own and relies on third party libraries (such as LibTomMath, GnuMP, or TomsFastMath). 5036 5037 The build process now consists of installing a math library first, and then building and installing LibTomCrypt with a math library 5038 configured. Note that LibTomCrypt can be built with no internal math descriptors. This means that one must be provided at either 5039 build, or run time for the application. LibTomCrypt comes with three math descriptors that provide a standard interface to math 5040 libraries. 5041 5042 \mysection{Makefile variables} 5043 5044 All GNU driven makefiles (including the makefile for ICC) use a set of common variables to control the build and install process. Most of the 5045 settings can be overwritten from the command line which makes custom installation a breeze. 5046 5047 \index{MAKE}\index{CC}\index{AR} 5048 \subsection{MAKE, CC and AR} 5049 The MAKE, CC and AR flags can all be overwritten. They default to \textit{make}, \textit{\$CC} and \textit{\$AR} respectively. 5050 Changing MAKE allows you to change what program will be invoked to handle sub--directories. For example, this 5051 5052 \begin{verbatim} 5053 MAKE=gmake gmake install 5054 \end{verbatim} 5055 5056 \begin{flushleft} will build and install the libraries with the \textit{gmake} tool. Similarly, \end{flushleft} 5057 5058 \begin{verbatim} 5059 CC=arm-gcc AR=arm-ar make 5060 \end{verbatim} 5061 5062 \begin{flushleft} will build the library using \textit{arm--gcc} as the compiler and \textit{arm--ar} as the archiver. \end{flushleft} 5063 5064 \subsection{IGNORE\_SPEED} 5065 \index{IGNORE\_SPEED} 5066 When \textbf{IGNORE\_SPEED} has been defined the default optimization flags for CFLAGS will be disabled which allows the developer to specify new 5067 CFLAGS on the command line. E.g. to add debugging 5068 5069 \begin{verbatim} 5070 CFLAGS="-g3" make IGNORE_SPEED=1 5071 \end{verbatim} 5072 5073 This will turn off optimizations and add \textit{-g3} to the CFLAGS which enables debugging. 5074 5075 \subsection{LIBNAME and LIBNAME\_S} 5076 \index{LIBNAME} \index{LIBNAME\_S} 5077 \textbf{LIBNAME} is the name of the output library (archive) to create. It defaults to \textit{libtomcrypt.a} for static builds and \textit{libtomcrypt.la} for 5078 shared. The \textbf{LIBNAME\_S} variable is the static name while doing shared builds. Ideally they should have the same prefix but don't have to. 5079 5080 \index{LIBTEST} \index{LIBTEST\_S} 5081 Similarly \textbf{LIBTEST} and \textbf{LIBTEST\_S} are the names for the profiling and testing library. The default is \textit{libtomcrypt\_prof.a} for 5082 static and \textit{libtomcrypt\_prof.la} for shared. 5083 5084 \subsection{Installation Directories} 5085 \index{DESTDIR} \index{LIBPATH} \index{INCPATH} \index{DATADIR} 5086 \textbf{DESTDIR} is the prefix for the installation directories. It defaults to an empty string. \textbf{LIBPATH} is the prefix for the library 5087 directory which defaults to \textit{/usr/lib}. \textbf{INCPATH} is the prefix for the header file directory which defaults to \textit{/usr/include}. 5088 \textbf{DATADIR} is the prefix for the data (documentation) directory which defaults to \textit{/usr/share/doc/libtomcrypt/pdf}. 5089 5090 All four can be used to create custom install locations depending on the nature of the OS and file system in use. 5091 5092 \begin{verbatim} 5093 make LIBPATH=/home/tom/project/lib INCPATH=/home/tom/project/include \ 5094 DATAPATH=/home/tom/project/docs install 5095 \end{verbatim} 5096 5097 This will build the library and install it to the directories under \textit{/home/tom/project/}. e.g. 5098 5099 \begin{small} 5100 \begin{verbatim} 5101 /home/tom/project/: 5102 total 1 5103 drwxr-xr-x 2 tom users 80 Jul 30 16:02 docs 5104 drwxr-xr-x 2 tom users 528 Jul 30 16:02 include 5105 drwxr-xr-x 2 tom users 80 Jul 30 16:02 lib 5106 5107 /home/tom/project/docs: 5108 total 452 5109 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 459009 Jul 30 16:02 crypt.pdf 5110 5111 /home/tom/project/include: 5112 total 132 5113 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 2482 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt.h 5114 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 702 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_argchk.h 5115 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 2945 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_cfg.h 5116 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 22763 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_cipher.h 5117 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 5174 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_custom.h 5118 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 11314 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_hash.h 5119 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 11571 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_mac.h 5120 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 13614 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_macros.h 5121 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 14714 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_math.h 5122 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 632 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_misc.h 5123 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 10934 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_pk.h 5124 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 2634 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_pkcs.h 5125 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 7067 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_prng.h 5126 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 1467 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_test.h 5127 5128 /home/tom/project/lib: 5129 total 1073 5130 -rwxr-xr-x 1 tom users 1096284 Jul 30 16:02 libtomcrypt.a 5131 \end{verbatim} 5132 \end{small} 5133 5134 \mysection{Extra libraries} 5135 \index{EXTRALIBS} 5136 \textbf{EXTRALIBS} specifies any extra libraries required to link the test programs and shared libraries. They are specified in the notation 5137 that GCC expects for global archives. 5138 5139 \begin{verbatim} 5140 CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DUSE_TFM" EXTRALIBS=-ltfm make install \ 5141 test timing 5142 \end{verbatim} 5143 5144 This will install the library using the TomsFastMath library and link the \textit{libtfm.a} library out of the default library search path. The two 5145 defines are explained below. You can specify multiple archives (say if you want to support two math libraries, or add on additional code) to 5146 the \textbf{EXTRALIBS} variable by separating them by a space. 5147 5148 Note that \textbf{EXTRALIBS} is not required if you are only making and installing the static library but none of the test programs. 5149 5150 \mysection{Building a Static Library} 5151 5152 Building a static library is fairly trivial as it only requires one invocation of the GNU make command. 5153 5154 \begin{verbatim} 5155 CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC" make install 5156 \end{verbatim} 5157 5158 That will build LibTomCrypt (including the TomsFastMath descriptor), and install it in the default locations indicated previously. You can enable 5159 the built--in LibTomMath descriptor as well (or in place of the TomsFastMath descriptor). Similarly, you can build the library with no built--in 5160 math descriptors. 5161 5162 \begin{verbatim} 5163 make install 5164 \end{verbatim} 5165 5166 In this case, no math descriptors are present in the library and they will have to be made available at build or run time before you can use any of the 5167 public key functions. 5168 5169 Note that even if you include the built--in descriptors you must link against the source library as well. 5170 5171 \begin{verbatim} 5172 gcc -DTFM_DESC myprogram.c -ltomcrypt -ltfm -o myprogram 5173 \end{verbatim} 5174 5175 This will compile \textit{myprogram} and link it against the LibTomCrypt library as well as TomsFastMath (which must have been previously installed). Note that 5176 we define \textbf{TFM\_DESC} for compilation. This is so that the TFM descriptor symbol will be defined for the client application to make use of without 5177 giving warnings. 5178 5179 \mysection{Building a Shared Library} 5180 5181 LibTomCrypt can also be built as a shared library through the \textit{makefile.shared} make script. It is similar to use as the static script except 5182 that you \textbf{must} specify the \textbf{EXTRALIBS} variable at install time. 5183 5184 \begin{verbatim} 5185 CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC" EXTRALIBS=-ltfm make -f makefile.shared install 5186 \end{verbatim} 5187 5188 This will build and install the library and link the shared object against the TomsFastMath library (which must be installed as a shared object as well). The 5189 shared build process requires libtool to be installed. 5190 5191 \mysection{Header Configuration} 5192 The file \textit{tomcrypt\_cfg.h} is what lets you control various high level macros which control the behaviour of the library. Build options are also 5193 stored in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} which allow the enabling and disabling of various algorithms. 5194 5195 \subsubsection{ARGTYPE} 5196 This lets you control how the LTC\_ARGCHK macro will behave. The macro is used to check pointers inside the functions against 5197 NULL. There are four settings for ARGTYPE. When set to 0, it will have the default behaviour of printing a message to 5198 stderr and raising a SIGABRT signal. This is provided so all platforms that use LibTomCrypt can have an error that functions 5199 similarly. When set to 1, it will simply pass on to the assert() macro. When set to 2, the macro will display the error to 5200 stderr then return execution to the caller. This could lead to a segmentation fault (e.g. when a pointer is \textbf{NULL}) but is useful 5201 if you handle signals on your own. When set to 3, it will resolve to a empty macro and no error checking will be performed. Finally, when set 5202 to 4, it will return CRYPT\_INVALID\_ARG to the caller. 5203 5204 \subsubsection{Endianess} 5205 There are five macros related to endianess issues. For little endian platforms define, \textbf{ENDIAN\_LITTLE}. For big endian 5206 platforms define \textbf{ENDIAN\_BIG}. Similarly when the default word size of an \textit{unsigned long} is 32-bits define \textbf{ENDIAN\_32BITWORD} 5207 or define \textbf{ENDIAN\_64BITWORD} when its 64-bits. If you do not define any of them the library will automatically use \textbf{ENDIAN\_NEUTRAL} 5208 which will work on all platforms. 5209 5210 Currently LibTomCrypt will detect x86-32, x86-64, MIPS R5900, SPARC and SPARC64 running GCC as well as x86-32 running MSVC. 5211 5212 \mysection{The Configure Script} 5213 There are also options you can specify from the \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} header file. 5214 5215 \subsection{X memory routines} 5216 \index{XMALLOC}\index{XCALLOC}\index{XREALLOC}\index{XFREE} 5217 At the top of tomcrypt\_custom.h are a series of macros denoted as XMALLOC, XCALLOC, XREALLOC, XFREE, and so on. They resolve to 5218 the name of the respective functions from the standard C library by default. This lets you substitute in your own memory routines. 5219 If you substitute in your own functions they must behave like the standard C library functions in terms of what they expect as input and 5220 output. 5221 5222 These macros are handy for working with platforms which do not have a standard C library. For instance, the OLPC\footnote{See http://dev.laptop.org/git?p=bios-crypto;a=summary} 5223 bios code uses these macros to redirect to very compact heap and string operations. 5224 5225 \subsection{X clock routines} 5226 The rng\_get\_bytes() function can call a function that requires the clock() function. These macros let you override 5227 the default clock() used with a replacement. By default the standard C library clock() function is used. 5228 5229 \subsection{LTC\_NO\_FILE} 5230 During the build if LTC\_NO\_FILE is defined then any function in the library that uses file I/O will not call the file I/O 5231 functions and instead simply return CRYPT\_NOP. This should help resolve any linker errors stemming from a lack of 5232 file I/O on embedded platforms. 5233 5234 \subsection{LTC\_CLEAN\_STACK} 5235 When this functions is defined the functions that store key material on the stack will clean up afterwards. 5236 Assumes that you have no memory paging with the stack. 5237 5238 \subsection{LTC\_TEST} 5239 When this has been defined the various self--test functions (for ciphers, hashes, prngs, etc) are included in the build. This is the default configuration. 5240 If LTC\_NO\_TEST has been defined, the testing routines will be compacted and only return CRYPT\_NOP. 5241 5242 \subsection{LTC\_NO\_FAST} 5243 When this has been defined the library will not use faster word oriented operations. By default, they are only enabled for platforms 5244 which can be auto-detected. This macro ensures that they are never enabled. 5245 5246 \subsection{LTC\_FAST} 5247 This mode (auto-detected with x86\_32,x86\_64 platforms with GCC or MSVC) configures various routines such as ctr\_encrypt() or 5248 cbc\_encrypt() that it can safely XOR multiple octets in one step by using a larger data type. This has the benefit of 5249 cutting down the overhead of the respective functions. 5250 5251 This mode does have one downside. It can cause unaligned reads from memory if you are not careful with the functions. This is why 5252 it has been enabled by default only for the x86 class of processors where unaligned accesses are allowed. Technically LTC\_FAST 5253 is not \textit{portable} since unaligned accesses are not covered by the ISO C specifications. 5254 5255 In practice however, you can use it on pretty much any platform (even MIPS) with care. 5256 5257 By design the \textit{fast} mode functions won't get unaligned on their own. For instance, if you call ctr\_encrypt() right after calling 5258 ctr\_start() and all the inputs you gave are aligned than ctr\_encrypt() will perform aligned memory operations only. However, if you 5259 call ctr\_encrypt() with an odd amount of plaintext then call it again the CTR pad (the IV) will be partially used. This will 5260 cause the ctr routine to first use up the remaining pad bytes. Then if there are enough plaintext bytes left it will use 5261 whole word XOR operations. These operations will be unaligned. 5262 5263 The simplest precaution is to make sure you process all data in power of two blocks and handle \textit{remainder} at the end. e.g. If you are 5264 CTR'ing a long stream process it in blocks of (say) four kilobytes and handle any remaining incomplete blocks at the end of the stream. 5265 5266 \index{LTC\_FAST\_TYPE} 5267 If you do plan on using the \textit{LTC\_FAST} mode you have to also define a \textit{LTC\_FAST\_TYPE} macro which resolves to an optimal sized 5268 data type you can perform integer operations with. Ideally it should be four or eight bytes since it must properly divide the size 5269 of your block cipher (e.g. 16 bytes for AES). This means sadly if you're on a platform with 57--bit words (or something) you can't 5270 use this mode. So sad. 5271 5272 \subsection{LTC\_NO\_ASM} 5273 When this has been defined the library will not use any inline assembler. Only a few platforms support assembler inlines but various versions of ICC and GCC 5274 cannot handle all of the assembler functions. 5275 5276 \subsection{Symmetric Ciphers, One-way Hashes, PRNGS and Public Key Functions} 5277 There are a plethora of macros for the ciphers, hashes, PRNGs and public key functions which are fairly 5278 self-explanatory. When they are defined the functionality is included otherwise it is not. There are some 5279 dependency issues which are noted in the file. For instance, Yarrow requires CTR chaining mode, a block 5280 cipher and a hash function. 5281 5282 Also see technical note number five for more details. 5283 5284 \subsection{LTC\_EASY} 5285 When defined the library is configured to build fewer algorithms and modes. Mostly it sticks to NIST and ANSI approved algorithms. See 5286 the header file \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} for more details. It is meant to provide literally an easy method of trimming the library 5287 build to the most minimum of useful functionality. 5288 5289 \subsection{TWOFISH\_SMALL and TWOFISH\_TABLES} 5290 Twofish is a 128-bit symmetric block cipher that is provided within the library. The cipher itself is flexible enough 5291 to allow some trade-offs in the implementation. When TWOFISH\_SMALL is defined the scheduled symmetric key for Twofish 5292 requires only 200 bytes of memory. This is achieved by not pre-computing the substitution boxes. Having this 5293 defined will also greatly slow down the cipher. When this macro is not defined Twofish will pre-compute the 5294 tables at a cost of 4KB of memory. The cipher will be much faster as a result. 5295 5296 When TWOFISH\_TABLES is defined the cipher will use pre-computed (and fixed in code) tables required to work. This is 5297 useful when TWOFISH\_SMALL is defined as the table values are computed on the fly. When this is defined the code size 5298 will increase by approximately 500 bytes. If this is defined but TWOFISH\_SMALL is not the cipher will still work but 5299 it will not speed up the encryption or decryption functions. 5300 5301 \subsection{GCM\_TABLES} 5302 When defined GCM will use a 64KB table (per GCM state) which will greatly speed up the per--packet latency. 5303 It also increases the initialization time and is not suitable when you are going to use a key a few times only. 5304 5305 \subsection{GCM\_TABLES\_SSE2} 5306 \index{SSE2} 5307 When defined GCM will use the SSE2 instructions to perform the $GF(2^x)$ multiply using 16 128--bit XOR operations. It shaves a few cycles per byte 5308 of GCM output on both the AMD64 and Intel Pentium 4 platforms. Requires GCC and an SSE2 equipped platform. 5309 5310 \subsection{LTC\_SMALL\_CODE} 5311 When this is defined some of the code such as the Rijndael and SAFER+ ciphers are replaced with smaller code variants. 5312 These variants are slower but can save quite a bit of code space. 5313 5314 \subsection{LTC\_PTHREAD} 5315 When this is activated all of the descriptor table functions will use pthread locking to ensure thread safe updates to the tables. Note that 5316 it doesn't prevent a thread that is passively using a table from being messed up by another thread that updates the table. 5317 5318 Generally the rule of thumb is to setup the tables once at startup and then leave them be. This added build flag simply makes updating 5319 the tables safer. 5320 5321 \subsection{LTC\_ECC\_TIMING\_RESISTANT} 5322 When this has been defined the ECC point multiplier (built--in to the library) will use a timing resistant point multiplication 5323 algorithm which prevents leaking key bits of the private key (scalar). It is a slower algorithm but useful for situations 5324 where timing side channels pose a significant threat. 5325 5326 \subsection{Math Descriptors} 5327 The library comes with three math descriptors that allow you to interface the public key cryptography API to freely available math 5328 libraries. When \textbf{GMP\_DESC}, \textbf{LTM\_DESC}, or \textbf{TFM\_DESC} are defined 5329 descriptors for the respective library are built and included in the library as \textit{gmp\_desc}, \textit{ltm\_desc}, or \textit{tfm\_desc} respectively. 5330 5331 In the test demos that use the libraries the additional flags \textbf{USE\_GMP}, \textbf{USE\_LTM}, and \textbf{USE\_TFM} can be defined 5332 to tell the program which library to use. Only one of the USE flags can be defined at once. 5333 5334 \index{GMP\_DESC} \index{USE\_GMP} \index{LTM\_DESC} \index{TFM\_DESC} \index{USE\_LTM} \index{USE\_TFM} 5335 \begin{small} 5336 \begin{verbatim} 5337 CFLAGS="-DGMP_DESC -DLTM_DESC -DTFM_DESC -DUSE_TFM" \ 5338 EXTRALIBS="-lgmp -ltommath -ltfm" make -f makefile.shared install timing 5339 \end{verbatim} 5340 \end{small} 5341 5342 That will build and install the library with all descriptors (and link against all), but only use TomsFastMath in the timing demo. 5343 5344 \chapter{Optimizations} 5345 \mysection{Introduction} 5346 The entire API was designed with plug and play in mind at the low level. That is you can swap out any cipher, hash, PRNG or bignum library and the dependent API will not 5347 require updating. This has the nice benefit that one can add ciphers (etc.) not have to re--write portions of the API. For the most part, LibTomCrypt has also been written 5348 to be highly portable and easy to build out of the box on pretty much any platform. As such there are no assembler inlines throughout the code, I make no assumptions 5349 about the platform, etc... 5350 5351 That works well for most cases but there are times where performance is of the essence. This API allows optimized routines to be dropped in--place of the existing 5352 portable routines. For instance, hand optimized assembler versions of AES could be provided. Any existing function that uses the cipher could automatically use 5353 the optimized code without re--writing. This also paves the way for hardware drivers that can access hardware accelerated cryptographic devices. 5354 5355 At the heart of this flexibility is the \textit{descriptor} system. A descriptor is essentially just a C \textit{struct} which describes the algorithm and provides pointers 5356 to functions that do the required work. For a given class of operation (e.g. cipher, hash, prng, bignum) the functions of a descriptor have identical prototypes which makes 5357 development simple. In most dependent routines all an end developer has to do is register\_XXX() the descriptor and they are set. 5358 5359 \mysection{Ciphers} 5360 The ciphers in LibTomCrypt are accessed through the ltc\_cipher\_descriptor structure. 5361 5362 \label{sec:cipherdesc} 5363 \begin{small} 5364 \begin{verbatim} 5365 struct ltc_cipher_descriptor { 5366 /** name of cipher */ 5367 char *name; 5368 5369 /** internal ID */ 5370 unsigned char ID; 5371 5372 /** min keysize (octets) */ 5373 int min_key_length, 5374 5375 /** max keysize (octets) */ 5376 max_key_length, 5377 5378 /** block size (octets) */ 5379 block_length, 5380 5381 /** default number of rounds */ 5382 default_rounds; 5383 5384 /** Setup the cipher 5385 @param key The input symmetric key 5386 @param keylen The length of the input key (octets) 5387 @param num_rounds The requested number of rounds (0==default) 5388 @param skey [out] The destination of the scheduled key 5389 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5390 */ 5391 int (*setup)(const unsigned char *key, 5392 int keylen, 5393 int num_rounds, 5394 symmetric_key *skey); 5395 5396 /** Encrypt a block 5397 @param pt The plaintext 5398 @param ct [out] The ciphertext 5399 @param skey The scheduled key 5400 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5401 */ 5402 int (*ecb_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt, 5403 unsigned char *ct, 5404 symmetric_key *skey); 5405 5406 /** Decrypt a block 5407 @param ct The ciphertext 5408 @param pt [out] The plaintext 5409 @param skey The scheduled key 5410 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5411 */ 5412 int (*ecb_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct, 5413 unsigned char *pt, 5414 symmetric_key *skey); 5415 5416 /** Test the block cipher 5417 @return CRYPT_OK if successful, 5418 CRYPT_NOP if self-testing has been disabled 5419 */ 5420 int (*test)(void); 5421 5422 /** Terminate the context 5423 @param skey The scheduled key 5424 */ 5425 void (*done)(symmetric_key *skey); 5426 5427 /** Determine a key size 5428 @param keysize [in/out] The size of the key desired 5429 The suggested size 5430 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5431 */ 5432 int (*keysize)(int *keysize); 5433 5434 /** Accelerators **/ 5435 /** Accelerated ECB encryption 5436 @param pt Plaintext 5437 @param ct Ciphertext 5438 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5439 @param skey The scheduled key context 5440 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5441 */ 5442 int (*accel_ecb_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt, 5443 unsigned char *ct, 5444 unsigned long blocks, 5445 symmetric_key *skey); 5446 5447 /** Accelerated ECB decryption 5448 @param pt Plaintext 5449 @param ct Ciphertext 5450 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5451 @param skey The scheduled key context 5452 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5453 */ 5454 int (*accel_ecb_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct, 5455 unsigned char *pt, 5456 unsigned long blocks, 5457 symmetric_key *skey); 5458 5459 /** Accelerated CBC encryption 5460 @param pt Plaintext 5461 @param ct Ciphertext 5462 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5463 @param IV The initial value (input/output) 5464 @param skey The scheduled key context 5465 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5466 */ 5467 int (*accel_cbc_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt, 5468 unsigned char *ct, 5469 unsigned long blocks, 5470 unsigned char *IV, 5471 symmetric_key *skey); 5472 5473 /** Accelerated CBC decryption 5474 @param pt Plaintext 5475 @param ct Ciphertext 5476 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5477 @param IV The initial value (input/output) 5478 @param skey The scheduled key context 5479 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5480 */ 5481 int (*accel_cbc_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct, 5482 unsigned char *pt, 5483 unsigned long blocks, 5484 unsigned char *IV, 5485 symmetric_key *skey); 5486 5487 /** Accelerated CTR encryption 5488 @param pt Plaintext 5489 @param ct Ciphertext 5490 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5491 @param IV The initial value (input/output) 5492 @param mode little or big endian counter (mode=0 or mode=1) 5493 @param skey The scheduled key context 5494 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5495 */ 5496 int (*accel_ctr_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt, 5497 unsigned char *ct, 5498 unsigned long blocks, 5499 unsigned char *IV, 5500 int mode, 5501 symmetric_key *skey); 5502 5503 /** Accelerated LRW 5504 @param pt Plaintext 5505 @param ct Ciphertext 5506 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5507 @param IV The initial value (input/output) 5508 @param tweak The LRW tweak 5509 @param skey The scheduled key context 5510 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5511 */ 5512 int (*accel_lrw_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt, 5513 unsigned char *ct, 5514 unsigned long blocks, 5515 unsigned char *IV, 5516 const unsigned char *tweak, 5517 symmetric_key *skey); 5518 5519 /** Accelerated LRW 5520 @param ct Ciphertext 5521 @param pt Plaintext 5522 @param blocks The number of complete blocks to process 5523 @param IV The initial value (input/output) 5524 @param tweak The LRW tweak 5525 @param skey The scheduled key context 5526 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5527 */ 5528 int (*accel_lrw_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct, 5529 unsigned char *pt, 5530 unsigned long blocks, 5531 unsigned char *IV, 5532 const unsigned char *tweak, 5533 symmetric_key *skey); 5534 5535 /** Accelerated CCM packet (one-shot) 5536 @param key The secret key to use 5537 @param keylen The length of the secret key (octets) 5538 @param uskey A previously scheduled key [can be NULL] 5539 @param nonce The session nonce [use once] 5540 @param noncelen The length of the nonce 5541 @param header The header for the session 5542 @param headerlen The length of the header (octets) 5543 @param pt [out] The plaintext 5544 @param ptlen The length of the plaintext (octets) 5545 @param ct [out] The ciphertext 5546 @param tag [out] The destination tag 5547 @param taglen [in/out] The max size and resulting size 5548 of the authentication tag 5549 @param direction Encrypt or Decrypt direction (0 or 1) 5550 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5551 */ 5552 int (*accel_ccm_memory)( 5553 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 5554 symmetric_key *uskey, 5555 const unsigned char *nonce, unsigned long noncelen, 5556 const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen, 5557 unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 5558 unsigned char *ct, 5559 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen, 5560 int direction); 5561 5562 /** Accelerated GCM packet (one shot) 5563 @param key The secret key 5564 @param keylen The length of the secret key 5565 @param IV The initial vector 5566 @param IVlen The length of the initial vector 5567 @param adata The additional authentication data (header) 5568 @param adatalen The length of the adata 5569 @param pt The plaintext 5570 @param ptlen The length of the plaintext/ciphertext 5571 @param ct The ciphertext 5572 @param tag [out] The MAC tag 5573 @param taglen [in/out] The MAC tag length 5574 @param direction Encrypt or Decrypt mode (GCM_ENCRYPT or GCM_DECRYPT) 5575 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5576 */ 5577 int (*accel_gcm_memory)( 5578 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 5579 const unsigned char *IV, unsigned long IVlen, 5580 const unsigned char *adata, unsigned long adatalen, 5581 unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen, 5582 unsigned char *ct, 5583 unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen, 5584 int direction); 5585 5586 /** Accelerated one shot OMAC 5587 @param key The secret key 5588 @param keylen The key length (octets) 5589 @param in The message 5590 @param inlen Length of message (octets) 5591 @param out [out] Destination for tag 5592 @param outlen [in/out] Initial and final size of out 5593 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5594 */ 5595 int (*omac_memory)( 5596 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 5597 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 5598 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 5599 5600 /** Accelerated one shot XCBC 5601 @param key The secret key 5602 @param keylen The key length (octets) 5603 @param in The message 5604 @param inlen Length of message (octets) 5605 @param out [out] Destination for tag 5606 @param outlen [in/out] Initial and final size of out 5607 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5608 */ 5609 int (*xcbc_memory)( 5610 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 5611 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 5612 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 5613 5614 /** Accelerated one shot F9 5615 @param key The secret key 5616 @param keylen The key length (octets) 5617 @param in The message 5618 @param inlen Length of message (octets) 5619 @param out [out] Destination for tag 5620 @param outlen [in/out] Initial and final size of out 5621 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5622 @remark Requires manual padding 5623 */ 5624 int (*f9_memory)( 5625 const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen, 5626 const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 5627 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen); 5628 }; 5629 \end{verbatim} 5630 \end{small} 5631 5632 \subsection{Name} 5633 \index{find\_cipher()} 5634 The \textit{name} parameter specifies the name of the cipher. This is what a developer would pass to find\_cipher() to find the cipher in the descriptor 5635 tables. 5636 5637 \subsection{Internal ID} 5638 This is a single byte Internal ID you can use to distinguish ciphers from each other. 5639 5640 \subsection{Key Lengths} 5641 The minimum key length is \textit{min\_key\_length} and is measured in octets. Similarly the maximum key length is \textit{max\_key\_length}. They can be equal 5642 and both must valid key sizes for the cipher. Values in between are not assumed to be valid though they may be. 5643 5644 \subsection{Block Length} 5645 The size of the ciphers plaintext or ciphertext is \textit{block\_length} and is measured in octets. 5646 5647 \subsection{Rounds} 5648 Some ciphers allow different number of rounds to be used. Usually you just use the default. The default round count is \textit{default\_rounds}. 5649 5650 \subsection{Setup} 5651 To initialize a cipher (for ECB mode) the function setup() was provided. It accepts an array of key octets \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets. The user 5652 can specify the number of rounds they want through \textit{num\_rounds} where $num\_rounds = 0$ means use the default. The destination of a scheduled key is stored 5653 in \textit{skey}. 5654 5655 Inside the \textit{symmetric\_key} union there is a \textit{void *data} which you can use to allocate data if you need a data structure that does not fit with the existing 5656 ones provided. Just make sure in your \textit{done()} function that you free the allocated memory. 5657 5658 \subsection{Single block ECB} 5659 To process a single block in ECB mode the ecb\_encrypt() and ecb\_decrypt() functions were provided. The plaintext and ciphertext buffers are allowed to overlap so you 5660 must make sure you do not overwrite the output before you are finished with the input. 5661 5662 \subsection{Testing} 5663 The test() function is used to self--test the \textit{device}. It takes no arguments and returns \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if all is working properly. You may return 5664 \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP} to indicate that no testing was performed. 5665 5666 \subsection{Key Sizing} 5667 Occasionally, a function will want to find a suitable key size to use since the input is oddly sized. The keysize() function is for this case. It accepts a 5668 pointer to an integer which represents the desired size. The function then has to match it to the exact or a lower key size that is valid for the cipher. For 5669 example, if the input is $25$ and $24$ is valid then it stores $24$ back in the pointed to integer. It must not round up and must return an error if the keysize 5670 cannot be mapped to a valid key size for the cipher. 5671 5672 \subsection{Acceleration} 5673 The next set of functions cover the accelerated functionality of the cipher descriptor. Any combination of these functions may be set to \textbf{NULL} to indicate 5674 it is not supported. In those cases the software defaults are used (using the single ECB block routines). 5675 5676 \subsubsection{Accelerated ECB} 5677 These two functions are meant for cases where a user wants to encrypt (in ECB mode no less) an array of blocks. These functions are accessed 5678 through the accel\_ecb\_encrypt and accel\_ecb\_decrypt pointers. The \textit{blocks} count is the number of complete blocks to process. 5679 5680 \subsubsection{Accelerated CBC} 5681 These two functions are meant for accelerated CBC encryption. These functions are accessed through the accel\_cbc\_encrypt and accel\_cbc\_decrypt pointers. 5682 The \textit{blocks} value is the number of complete blocks to process. The \textit{IV} is the CBC initial vector. It is an input upon calling this function and must be 5683 updated by the function before returning. 5684 5685 \subsubsection{Accelerated CTR} 5686 This function is meant for accelerated CTR encryption. It is accessible through the accel\_ctr\_encrypt pointer. 5687 The \textit{blocks} value is the number of complete blocks to process. The \textit{IV} is the CTR counter vector. It is an input upon calling this function and must be 5688 updated by the function before returning. The \textit{mode} value indicates whether the counter is big (mode = CTR\_COUNTER\_BIG\_ENDIAN) or 5689 little (mode = CTR\_COUNTER\_LITTLE\_ENDIAN) endian. 5690 5691 This function (and the way it's called) differs from the other two since ctr\_encrypt() allows any size input plaintext. The accelerator will only be 5692 called if the following conditions are met. 5693 5694 \begin{enumerate} 5695 \item The accelerator is present 5696 \item The CTR pad is empty 5697 \item The remaining length of the input to process is greater than or equal to the block size. 5698 \end{enumerate} 5699 5700 The \textit{CTR pad} is empty when a multiple (including zero) blocks of text have been processed. That is, if you pass in seven bytes to AES--CTR mode you would have to 5701 pass in a minimum of nine extra bytes before the accelerator could be called. The CTR accelerator must increment the counter (and store it back into the 5702 buffer provided) before encrypting it to create the pad. 5703 5704 The accelerator will only be used to encrypt whole blocks. Partial blocks are always handled in software. 5705 5706 \subsubsection{Accelerated LRW} 5707 These functions are meant for accelerated LRW. They process blocks of input in lengths of multiples of 16 octets. They must accept the \textit{IV} and \textit{tweak} 5708 state variables and updated them prior to returning. Note that you may want to disable \textbf{LRW\_TABLES} in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} if you intend 5709 to use accelerators for LRW. 5710 5711 While both encrypt and decrypt accelerators are not required it is suggested as it makes lrw\_setiv() more efficient. 5712 5713 Note that calling lrw\_done() will only invoke the cipher\_descriptor[].done() function on the \textit{symmetric\_key} parameter of the LRW state. That means 5714 if your device requires any (LRW specific) resources you should free them in your ciphers() done function. The simplest way to think of it is to write 5715 the plugin solely to do LRW with the cipher. That way cipher\_descriptor[].setup() means to init LRW resources and cipher\_descriptor[].done() means to 5716 free them. 5717 5718 \subsubsection{Accelerated CCM} 5719 This function is meant for accelerated CCM encryption or decryption. It processes the entire packet in one call. You can optimize the work flow somewhat 5720 by allowing the caller to call the setup() function first to schedule the key if your accelerator cannot do the key schedule on the fly (for instance). This 5721 function MUST support both key passing methods. 5722 5723 \begin{center} 5724 \begin{small} 5725 \begin{tabular}{|r|r|l|} 5726 \hline \textbf{key} & \textbf{uskey} & \textbf{Source of key} \\ 5727 \hline NULL & NULL & Error, not supported \\ 5728 \hline non-NULL & NULL & Use key, do a key schedule \\ 5729 \hline NULL & non-NULL & Use uskey, key schedule not required \\ 5730 \hline non-NULL & non-NULL & Use uskey, key schedule not required \\ 5731 \hline 5732 \end{tabular} 5733 \end{small} 5734 \end{center} 5735 5736 \index{ccm\_memory()} This function is called when the user calls ccm\_memory(). 5737 5738 \subsubsection{Accelerated GCM} 5739 \index{gcm\_memory()} 5740 This function is meant for accelerated GCM encryption or decryption. It processes the entire packet in one call. Note that the setup() function will not 5741 be called prior to this. This function must handle scheduling the key provided on its own. It is called when the user calls gcm\_memory(). 5742 5743 \subsubsection{Accelerated OMAC} 5744 \index{omac\_memory()} 5745 This function is meant to perform an optimized OMAC1 (CMAC) message authentication code computation when the user calls omac\_memory(). 5746 5747 \subsubsection{Accelerated XCBC-MAC} 5748 \index{xcbc\_memory()} 5749 This function is meant to perform an optimized XCBC-MAC message authentication code computation when the user calls xcbc\_memory(). 5750 5751 \subsubsection{Accelerated F9} 5752 \index{f9\_memory()} 5753 This function is meant to perform an optimized F9 message authentication code computation when the user calls f9\_memory(). Like f9\_memory(), it requires 5754 the caller to perform any 3GPP related padding before calling in order to ensure proper compliance with F9. 5755 5756 5757 \mysection{One--Way Hashes} 5758 The hash functions are accessed through the ltc\_hash\_descriptor structure. 5759 5760 \begin{small} 5761 \begin{verbatim} 5762 struct ltc_hash_descriptor { 5763 /** name of hash */ 5764 char *name; 5765 5766 /** internal ID */ 5767 unsigned char ID; 5768 5769 /** Size of digest in octets */ 5770 unsigned long hashsize; 5771 5772 /** Input block size in octets */ 5773 unsigned long blocksize; 5774 5775 /** ASN.1 OID */ 5776 unsigned long OID[16]; 5777 5778 /** Length of DER encoding */ 5779 unsigned long OIDlen; 5780 5781 /** Init a hash state 5782 @param hash The hash to initialize 5783 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5784 */ 5785 int (*init)(hash_state *hash); 5786 5787 /** Process a block of data 5788 @param hash The hash state 5789 @param in The data to hash 5790 @param inlen The length of the data (octets) 5791 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5792 */ 5793 int (*process)( hash_state *hash, 5794 const unsigned char *in, 5795 unsigned long inlen); 5796 5797 /** Produce the digest and store it 5798 @param hash The hash state 5799 @param out [out] The destination of the digest 5800 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5801 */ 5802 int (*done)( hash_state *hash, 5803 unsigned char *out); 5804 5805 /** Self-test 5806 @return CRYPT_OK if successful, 5807 CRYPT_NOP if self-tests have been disabled 5808 */ 5809 int (*test)(void); 5810 5811 /* accelerated hmac callback: if you need to-do 5812 multiple packets just use the generic hmac_memory 5813 and provide a hash callback 5814 */ 5815 int (*hmac_block)(const unsigned char *key, 5816 unsigned long keylen, 5817 const unsigned char *in, 5818 unsigned long inlen, 5819 unsigned char *out, 5820 unsigned long *outlen); 5821 }; 5822 \end{verbatim} 5823 \end{small} 5824 5825 \subsection{Name} 5826 This is the name the hash is known by and what find\_hash() will look for. 5827 5828 \subsection{Internal ID} 5829 This is the internal ID byte used to distinguish the hash from other hashes. 5830 5831 \subsection{Digest Size} 5832 The \textit{hashsize} variable indicates the length of the output in octets. 5833 5834 \subsection{Block Size} 5835 The \textit{blocksize} variable indicates the length of input (in octets) that the hash processes in a given 5836 invocation. 5837 5838 \subsection{OID Identifier} 5839 This is the universal ASN.1 Object Identifier for the hash. 5840 5841 \subsection{Initialization} 5842 The init function initializes the hash and prepares it to process message bytes. 5843 5844 \subsection{Process} 5845 This processes message bytes. The algorithm must accept any length of input that the hash would allow. The input is not 5846 guaranteed to be a multiple of the block size in length. 5847 5848 \subsection{Done} 5849 The done function terminates the hash and returns the message digest. 5850 5851 \subsection{Acceleration} 5852 A compatible accelerator must allow processing data in any granularity which may require internal padding on the driver side. 5853 5854 \subsection{HMAC Acceleration} 5855 The hmac\_block() callback is meant for single--shot optimized HMAC implementations. It is called directly by hmac\_memory() if present. If you need 5856 to be able to process multiple blocks per MAC then you will have to simply provide a process() callback and use hmac\_memory() as provided in LibTomCrypt. 5857 5858 \mysection{Pseudo--Random Number Generators} 5859 The pseudo--random number generators are accessible through the ltc\_prng\_descriptor structure. 5860 5861 \begin{small} 5862 \begin{verbatim} 5863 struct ltc_prng_descriptor { 5864 /** Name of the PRNG */ 5865 char *name; 5866 5867 /** size in bytes of exported state */ 5868 int export_size; 5869 5870 /** Start a PRNG state 5871 @param prng [out] The state to initialize 5872 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5873 */ 5874 int (*start)(prng_state *prng); 5875 5876 /** Add entropy to the PRNG 5877 @param in The entropy 5878 @param inlen Length of the entropy (octets) 5879 @param prng The PRNG state 5880 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5881 */ 5882 int (*add_entropy)(const unsigned char *in, 5883 unsigned long inlen, 5884 prng_state *prng); 5885 5886 /** Ready a PRNG state to read from 5887 @param prng The PRNG state to ready 5888 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5889 */ 5890 int (*ready)(prng_state *prng); 5891 5892 /** Read from the PRNG 5893 @param out [out] Where to store the data 5894 @param outlen Length of data desired (octets) 5895 @param prng The PRNG state to read from 5896 @return Number of octets read 5897 */ 5898 unsigned long (*read)(unsigned char *out, 5899 unsigned long outlen, 5900 prng_state *prng); 5901 5902 /** Terminate a PRNG state 5903 @param prng The PRNG state to terminate 5904 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5905 */ 5906 int (*done)(prng_state *prng); 5907 5908 /** Export a PRNG state 5909 @param out [out] The destination for the state 5910 @param outlen [in/out] The max size and resulting size 5911 @param prng The PRNG to export 5912 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5913 */ 5914 int (*pexport)(unsigned char *out, 5915 unsigned long *outlen, 5916 prng_state *prng); 5917 5918 /** Import a PRNG state 5919 @param in The data to import 5920 @param inlen The length of the data to import (octets) 5921 @param prng The PRNG to initialize/import 5922 @return CRYPT_OK if successful 5923 */ 5924 int (*pimport)(const unsigned char *in, 5925 unsigned long inlen, 5926 prng_state *prng); 5927 5928 /** Self-test the PRNG 5929 @return CRYPT_OK if successful, 5930 CRYPT_NOP if self-testing has been disabled 5931 */ 5932 int (*test)(void); 5933 }; 5934 \end{verbatim} 5935 \end{small} 5936 5937 \subsection{Name} 5938 The name by which find\_prng() will find the PRNG. 5939 5940 \subsection{Export Size} 5941 When an PRNG state is to be exported for future use you specify the space required in this variable. 5942 5943 \subsection{Start} 5944 Initialize the PRNG and make it ready to accept entropy. 5945 5946 \subsection{Entropy Addition} 5947 Add entropy to the PRNG state. The exact behaviour of this function depends on the particulars of the PRNG. 5948 5949 \subsection{Ready} 5950 This function makes the PRNG ready to read from by processing the entropy added. The behaviour of this function depends 5951 on the specific PRNG used. 5952 5953 \subsection{Read} 5954 Read from the PRNG and return the number of bytes read. This function does not have to fill the buffer but it is best 5955 if it does as many protocols do not retry reads and will fail on the first try. 5956 5957 \subsection{Done} 5958 Terminate a PRNG state. The behaviour of this function depends on the particular PRNG used. 5959 5960 \subsection{Exporting and Importing} 5961 An exported PRNG state is data that the PRNG can later import to resume activity. They're not meant to resume \textit{the same session} 5962 but should at least maintain the same level of state entropy. 5963 5964 \mysection{BigNum Math Descriptors} 5965 The library also makes use of the math descriptors to access math functions. While bignum math libraries usually differ in implementation 5966 it hasn't proven hard to write \textit{glue} to use math libraries so far. The basic descriptor looks like. 5967 5968 \begin{small} 5969 \begin{verbatim} 5970 /** math descriptor */ 5971 typedef struct { 5972 /** Name of the math provider */ 5973 char *name; 5974 5975 /** Bits per digit, amount of bits must fit in an unsigned long */ 5976 int bits_per_digit; 5977 5978 /* ---- init/deinit functions ---- */ 5979 5980 /** initialize a bignum 5981 @param a The number to initialize 5982 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5983 */ 5984 int (*init)(void **a); 5985 5986 /** init copy 5987 @param dst The number to initialize and write to 5988 @param src The number to copy from 5989 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5990 */ 5991 int (*init_copy)(void **dst, void *src); 5992 5993 /** deinit 5994 @param a The number to free 5995 @return CRYPT_OK on success 5996 */ 5997 void (*deinit)(void *a); 5998 5999 /* ---- data movement ---- */ 6000 6001 /** copy 6002 @param src The number to copy from 6003 @param dst The number to write to 6004 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6005 */ 6006 int (*copy)(void *src, void *dst); 6007 6008 /* ---- trivial low level functions ---- */ 6009 6010 /** set small constant 6011 @param a Number to write to 6012 @param n Source upto bits_per_digit (meant for small constants) 6013 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6014 */ 6015 int (*set_int)(void *a, unsigned long n); 6016 6017 /** get small constant 6018 @param a Small number to read 6019 @return The lower bits_per_digit of the integer (unsigned) 6020 */ 6021 unsigned long (*get_int)(void *a); 6022 6023 /** get digit n 6024 @param a The number to read from 6025 @param n The number of the digit to fetch 6026 @return The bits_per_digit sized n'th digit of a 6027 */ 6028 unsigned long (*get_digit)(void *a, int n); 6029 6030 /** Get the number of digits that represent the number 6031 @param a The number to count 6032 @return The number of digits used to represent the number 6033 */ 6034 int (*get_digit_count)(void *a); 6035 6036 /** compare two integers 6037 @param a The left side integer 6038 @param b The right side integer 6039 @return LTC_MP_LT if a < b, 6040 LTC_MP_GT if a > b and 6041 LTC_MP_EQ otherwise. (signed comparison) 6042 */ 6043 int (*compare)(void *a, void *b); 6044 6045 /** compare against int 6046 @param a The left side integer 6047 @param b The right side integer (upto bits_per_digit) 6048 @return LTC_MP_LT if a < b, 6049 LTC_MP_GT if a > b and 6050 LTC_MP_EQ otherwise. (signed comparison) 6051 */ 6052 int (*compare_d)(void *a, unsigned long n); 6053 6054 /** Count the number of bits used to represent the integer 6055 @param a The integer to count 6056 @return The number of bits required to represent the integer 6057 */ 6058 int (*count_bits)(void * a); 6059 6060 /** Count the number of LSB bits which are zero 6061 @param a The integer to count 6062 @return The number of contiguous zero LSB bits 6063 */ 6064 int (*count_lsb_bits)(void *a); 6065 6066 /** Compute a power of two 6067 @param a The integer to store the power in 6068 @param n The power of two you want to store (a = 2^n) 6069 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6070 */ 6071 int (*twoexpt)(void *a , int n); 6072 6073 /* ---- radix conversions ---- */ 6074 6075 /** read ascii string 6076 @param a The integer to store into 6077 @param str The string to read 6078 @param radix The radix the integer has been represented in (2-64) 6079 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6080 */ 6081 int (*read_radix)(void *a, const char *str, int radix); 6082 6083 /** write number to string 6084 @param a The integer to store 6085 @param str The destination for the string 6086 @param radix The radix the integer is to be represented in (2-64) 6087 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6088 */ 6089 int (*write_radix)(void *a, char *str, int radix); 6090 6091 /** get size as unsigned char string 6092 @param a The integer to get the size 6093 @return The length of the integer in octets 6094 */ 6095 unsigned long (*unsigned_size)(void *a); 6096 6097 /** store an integer as an array of octets 6098 @param src The integer to store 6099 @param dst The buffer to store the integer in 6100 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6101 */ 6102 int (*unsigned_write)(void *src, unsigned char *dst); 6103 6104 /** read an array of octets and store as integer 6105 @param dst The integer to load 6106 @param src The array of octets 6107 @param len The number of octets 6108 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6109 */ 6110 int (*unsigned_read)( void *dst, 6111 unsigned char *src, 6112 unsigned long len); 6113 6114 /* ---- basic math ---- */ 6115 6116 /** add two integers 6117 @param a The first source integer 6118 @param b The second source integer 6119 @param c The destination of "a + b" 6120 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6121 */ 6122 int (*add)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6123 6124 /** add two integers 6125 @param a The first source integer 6126 @param b The second source integer 6127 (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length) 6128 @param c The destination of "a + b" 6129 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6130 */ 6131 int (*addi)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c); 6132 6133 /** subtract two integers 6134 @param a The first source integer 6135 @param b The second source integer 6136 @param c The destination of "a - b" 6137 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6138 */ 6139 int (*sub)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6140 6141 /** subtract two integers 6142 @param a The first source integer 6143 @param b The second source integer 6144 (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length) 6145 @param c The destination of "a - b" 6146 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6147 */ 6148 int (*subi)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c); 6149 6150 /** multiply two integers 6151 @param a The first source integer 6152 @param b The second source integer 6153 (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length) 6154 @param c The destination of "a * b" 6155 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6156 */ 6157 int (*mul)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6158 6159 /** multiply two integers 6160 @param a The first source integer 6161 @param b The second source integer 6162 (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length) 6163 @param c The destination of "a * b" 6164 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6165 */ 6166 int (*muli)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c); 6167 6168 /** Square an integer 6169 @param a The integer to square 6170 @param b The destination 6171 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6172 */ 6173 int (*sqr)(void *a, void *b); 6174 6175 /** Divide an integer 6176 @param a The dividend 6177 @param b The divisor 6178 @param c The quotient (can be NULL to signify don't care) 6179 @param d The remainder (can be NULL to signify don't care) 6180 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6181 */ 6182 int (*div)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d); 6183 6184 /** divide by two 6185 @param a The integer to divide (shift right) 6186 @param b The destination 6187 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6188 */ 6189 int (*div_2)(void *a, void *b); 6190 6191 /** Get remainder (small value) 6192 @param a The integer to reduce 6193 @param b The modulus (upto bits_per_digit in length) 6194 @param c The destination for the residue 6195 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6196 */ 6197 int (*modi)(void *a, unsigned long b, unsigned long *c); 6198 6199 /** gcd 6200 @param a The first integer 6201 @param b The second integer 6202 @param c The destination for (a, b) 6203 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6204 */ 6205 int (*gcd)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6206 6207 /** lcm 6208 @param a The first integer 6209 @param b The second integer 6210 @param c The destination for [a, b] 6211 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6212 */ 6213 int (*lcm)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6214 6215 /** Modular multiplication 6216 @param a The first source 6217 @param b The second source 6218 @param c The modulus 6219 @param d The destination (a*b mod c) 6220 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6221 */ 6222 int (*mulmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d); 6223 6224 /** Modular squaring 6225 @param a The first source 6226 @param b The modulus 6227 @param c The destination (a*a mod b) 6228 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6229 */ 6230 int (*sqrmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6231 6232 /** Modular inversion 6233 @param a The value to invert 6234 @param b The modulus 6235 @param c The destination (1/a mod b) 6236 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6237 */ 6238 int (*invmod)(void *, void *, void *); 6239 6240 /* ---- reduction ---- */ 6241 6242 /** setup Montgomery 6243 @param a The modulus 6244 @param b The destination for the reduction digit 6245 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6246 */ 6247 int (*montgomery_setup)(void *a, void **b); 6248 6249 /** get normalization value 6250 @param a The destination for the normalization value 6251 @param b The modulus 6252 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6253 */ 6254 int (*montgomery_normalization)(void *a, void *b); 6255 6256 /** reduce a number 6257 @param a The number [and dest] to reduce 6258 @param b The modulus 6259 @param c The value "b" from montgomery_setup() 6260 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6261 */ 6262 int (*montgomery_reduce)(void *a, void *b, void *c); 6263 6264 /** clean up (frees memory) 6265 @param a The value "b" from montgomery_setup() 6266 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6267 */ 6268 void (*montgomery_deinit)(void *a); 6269 6270 /* ---- exponentiation ---- */ 6271 6272 /** Modular exponentiation 6273 @param a The base integer 6274 @param b The power (can be negative) integer 6275 @param c The modulus integer 6276 @param d The destination 6277 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6278 */ 6279 int (*exptmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d); 6280 6281 /** Primality testing 6282 @param a The integer to test 6283 @param b The destination of the result (FP_YES if prime) 6284 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6285 */ 6286 int (*isprime)(void *a, int *b); 6287 6288 /* ---- (optional) ecc point math ---- */ 6289 6290 /** ECC GF(p) point multiplication (from the NIST curves) 6291 @param k The integer to multiply the point by 6292 @param G The point to multiply 6293 @param R The destination for kG 6294 @param modulus The modulus for the field 6295 @param map Boolean indicated whether to map back to affine or not 6296 (can be ignored if you work in affine only) 6297 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6298 */ 6299 int (*ecc_ptmul)( void *k, 6300 ecc_point *G, 6301 ecc_point *R, 6302 void *modulus, 6303 int map); 6304 6305 /** ECC GF(p) point addition 6306 @param P The first point 6307 @param Q The second point 6308 @param R The destination of P + Q 6309 @param modulus The modulus 6310 @param mp The "b" value from montgomery_setup() 6311 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6312 */ 6313 int (*ecc_ptadd)(ecc_point *P, 6314 ecc_point *Q, 6315 ecc_point *R, 6316 void *modulus, 6317 void *mp); 6318 6319 /** ECC GF(p) point double 6320 @param P The first point 6321 @param R The destination of 2P 6322 @param modulus The modulus 6323 @param mp The "b" value from montgomery_setup() 6324 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6325 */ 6326 int (*ecc_ptdbl)(ecc_point *P, 6327 ecc_point *R, 6328 void *modulus, 6329 void *mp); 6330 6331 /** ECC mapping from projective to affine, 6332 currently uses (x,y,z) => (x/z^2, y/z^3, 1) 6333 @param P The point to map 6334 @param modulus The modulus 6335 @param mp The "b" value from montgomery_setup() 6336 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6337 @remark The mapping can be different but keep in mind a 6338 ecc_point only has three integers (x,y,z) so if 6339 you use a different mapping you have to make it fit. 6340 */ 6341 int (*ecc_map)(ecc_point *P, void *modulus, void *mp); 6342 6343 /** Computes kA*A + kB*B = C using Shamir's Trick 6344 @param A First point to multiply 6345 @param kA What to multiple A by 6346 @param B Second point to multiply 6347 @param kB What to multiple B by 6348 @param C [out] Destination point (can overlap with A or B) 6349 @param modulus Modulus for curve 6350 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6351 */ 6352 int (*ecc_mul2add)(ecc_point *A, void *kA, 6353 ecc_point *B, void *kB, 6354 ecc_point *C, 6355 void *modulus); 6356 6357 6358 /* ---- (optional) rsa optimized math (for internal CRT) ---- */ 6359 6360 /** RSA Key Generation 6361 @param prng An active PRNG state 6362 @param wprng The index of the PRNG desired 6363 @param size The size of the key in octets 6364 @param e The "e" value (public key). 6365 e==65537 is a good choice 6366 @param key [out] Destination of a newly created private key pair 6367 @return CRYPT_OK if successful, upon error all allocated ram is freed 6368 */ 6369 int (*rsa_keygen)(prng_state *prng, 6370 int wprng, 6371 int size, 6372 long e, 6373 rsa_key *key); 6374 6375 /** RSA exponentiation 6376 @param in The octet array representing the base 6377 @param inlen The length of the input 6378 @param out The destination (to be stored in an octet array format) 6379 @param outlen The length of the output buffer and the resulting size 6380 (zero padded to the size of the modulus) 6381 @param which PK_PUBLIC for public RSA and PK_PRIVATE for private RSA 6382 @param key The RSA key to use 6383 @return CRYPT_OK on success 6384 */ 6385 int (*rsa_me)(const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, 6386 unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen, int which, 6387 rsa_key *key); 6388 } ltc_math_descriptor; 6389 \end{verbatim} 6390 \end{small} 6391 6392 Most of the functions are fairly straightforward and do not need documentation. We'll cover the basic conventions of the API and then explain the accelerated functions. 6393 6394 \subsection{Conventions} 6395 6396 All \textit{bignums} are accessed through an opaque \textit{void *} data type. You must internally cast the pointer if you need to access members of your bignum structure. During 6397 the init calls a \textit{void **} will be passed where you allocate your structure and set the pointer then initialize the number to zero. During the deinit calls you must 6398 free the bignum as well as the structure you allocated to place it in. 6399 6400 All functions except the Montgomery reductions work from left to right with the arguments. For example, mul(a, b, c) computes $c \leftarrow ab$. 6401 6402 All functions (except where noted otherwise) return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} to signify a successful operation. All error codes must be valid LibTomCrypt error codes. 6403 6404 The digit routines (including functions with the \textit{i} suffix) use a \textit{unsigned long} to represent the digit. If your internal digit is larger than this you must 6405 then partition your digits. Normally this does not matter as \textit{unsigned long} will be the same size as your register size. Note that if your digit is smaller 6406 than an \textit{unsigned long} that is also acceptable as the \textit{bits\_per\_digit} parameter will specify this. 6407 6408 \subsection{ECC Functions} 6409 The ECC system in LibTomCrypt is based off of the NIST recommended curves over $GF(p)$ and is used to implement EC-DSA and EC-DH. The ECC functions work with 6410 the \textbf{ecc\_point} structure and assume the points are stored in Jacobian projective format. 6411 6412 \begin{verbatim} 6413 /** A point on a ECC curve, stored in Jacobian format such 6414 that (x,y,z) => (x/z^2, y/z^3, 1) when interpreted as affine */ 6415 typedef struct { 6416 /** The x co-ordinate */ 6417 void *x; 6418 /** The y co-ordinate */ 6419 void *y; 6420 /** The z co-ordinate */ 6421 void *z; 6422 } ecc_point; 6423 \end{verbatim} 6424 6425 All ECC functions must use this mapping system. The only exception is when you remap all ECC callbacks which will allow you to have more control 6426 over how the ECC math will be implemented. Out of the box you only have three parameters per point to use $(x, y, z)$ however, these are just void pointers. They 6427 could point to anything you want. The only further exception is the export functions which expects the values to be in affine format. 6428 6429 \subsubsection{Point Multiply} 6430 This will multiply the point $G$ by the scalar $k$ and store the result in the point $R$. The value should be mapped to affine only if $map$ is set to one. 6431 6432 \subsubsection{Point Addition} 6433 This will add the point $P$ to the point $Q$ and store it in the point $R$. The $mp$ parameter is the \textit{b} value from the montgomery\_setup() call. The input points 6434 may be in either affine (with $z = 1$) or projective format and the output point is always projective. 6435 6436 \subsubsection{Point Mapping} 6437 This will map the point $P$ back from projective to affine. The output point $P$ must be of the form $(x, y, 1)$. 6438 6439 \subsubsection{Shamir's Trick} 6440 \index{Shamir's Trick} 6441 \index{ltc\_ecc\_mul2add()} 6442 To accelerate EC--DSA verification the library provides a built--in function called ltc\_ecc\_mul2add(). This performs two point multiplications and an addition in 6443 roughly the time of one point multiplication. It is called from ecc\_verify\_hash() if an accelerator is not present. The acclerator function must allow the points to 6444 overlap (e.g., $A \leftarrow k_1A + k_2B$) and must return the final point in affine format. 6445 6446 6447 \subsection{RSA Functions} 6448 The RSA Modular Exponentiation (ME) function is used by the RSA API to perform exponentiations for private and public key operations. In particular for 6449 private key operations it uses the CRT approach to lower the time required. It is passed an RSA key with the following format. 6450 6451 \begin{verbatim} 6452 /** RSA PKCS style key */ 6453 typedef struct Rsa_key { 6454 /** Type of key, PK_PRIVATE or PK_PUBLIC */ 6455 int type; 6456 /** The public exponent */ 6457 void *e; 6458 /** The private exponent */ 6459 void *d; 6460 /** The modulus */ 6461 void *N; 6462 /** The p factor of N */ 6463 void *p; 6464 /** The q factor of N */ 6465 void *q; 6466 /** The 1/q mod p CRT param */ 6467 void *qP; 6468 /** The d mod (p - 1) CRT param */ 6469 void *dP; 6470 /** The d mod (q - 1) CRT param */ 6471 void *dQ; 6472 } rsa_key; 6473 \end{verbatim} 6474 6475 The call reads the \textit{in} buffer as an unsigned char array in big endian format. Then it performs the exponentiation and stores the output in big endian format 6476 to the \textit{out} buffer. The output must be zero padded (leading bytes) so that the length of the output matches the length of the modulus (in bytes). For example, 6477 for RSA--1024 the output is always 128 bytes regardless of how small the numerical value of the exponentiation is. 6478 6479 Since the function is given the entire RSA key (for private keys only) CRT is possible as prescribed in the PKCS \#1 v2.1 specification. 6480 6481 \newpage 6482 \markboth{Index}{Index} 6483 \input{crypt.ind} 6484 6485 \end{document} 6486 6487 % $Source: /cvs/libtom/libtomcrypt/crypt.tex,v $ 6488 % $Revision: 1.123 $ 6489 % $Date: 2006/12/16 19:08:17 $ 6490